JP6679228B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a game machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a prize game medium such as a predetermined number of prize balls is generated. Some are given to players. Further, a variable display device is provided which is capable of variably displaying identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) when a game medium wins a prize (starting condition is satisfied) in a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening). In some cases, when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, it can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player.

  Further, as the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that displays an image of a decorative pattern and a character image according to a predetermined priority order (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2005-13477, A

  However, there is a possibility that diversified effect images cannot be displayed appropriately.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying diversified effect images.

(A) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of identification information, comprising: a performance executing means for performing a performance using a performance image; and a notification means for performing a notification using a notification image, The executing means includes a first effect for displaying the first effect image in the first area in the first layer and a second area wider than the first area in the second layer arranged on the back side of the first layer. A predetermined effect image is provided over a plurality of times of variable display of the identification information in a predetermined area where the second effect displaying the second effect image and the identification information in the third layer different from the first layer and the second layer overlap. a predetermined effect to be displayed during the period, it is possible to perform, when doing variable display of the identification information, than the second layer and the third layer is disposed on the rear side layer Displays the identification information, when it has stopped displaying the identification information, the display of the identification information to the layer disposed on the front side of the first layer and the third layer, the notification means uses an error notification image The gaming machine is characterized in that the error can be notified by an error, and the error notification image has a higher priority of image display than the effect image.
(B) Further, the gaming machine described in (A) further includes character information display means for displaying character information relating to variable display, and the character information display means is effected during variable display. The character information corresponding to the character information is displayed, and the content of the character information can be specified even when the interlocking image that is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body is displayed, depending on the type of effect corresponding to the character information. The display time of the character information is changed.
(1) In order to achieve the above object, another gaming machine is a gaming machine that performs a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine), and an effect image (for example, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 48). Effect producing means (eg, chance zone effect operation control processing of step S543, step-up notice effect operation control processing of step S544, etc.) for executing an effect using various effect images shown in FIG. (For example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28 and the like) and a notification unit (for example, an error notification process in step S75) for performing a notification, the effect execution unit is configured to operate in the first area ( As shown in FIG. 27A, the first effect (for example, chance zone effect) using the first effect image (for example, chance zone effect image) in the image size “small” area, and the first area Second effect (for example, step-up notice) that uses a second effect image (for example, step-up notice effect image) in a wider second area (area of image size “large” as shown in FIG. 27A) , Etc., and the first effect image is set to have a higher image display priority than the second effect image (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, when the Z value is “7”). The chance zone effect image is displayed in front of the step-up notice effect image of Z value “8”), and the notification means uses an error notification image (for example, the error notification image shown in FIG. 28). The error notification image is set to have a higher image display priority than the effect image (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, the error notification image with the Z value “0” is , For example, for Z value "4" It is displayed on the front side than the stuff effect effect image).

  According to the above configuration, diversified effect images can be displayed appropriately.

(2) Further, the gaming machine described in (1) above is a notification means (for example, an error notification in step S75) for performing notification using a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28 and the like). Processing) and the notification means can notify an error using an error notification image (for example, the error notification image shown in FIG. 28), and the error notification image is displayed as an image in comparison with the effect image. Is set to have a higher priority (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, an error notification image with a Z value of "0" is displayed in front of the accessory effect effect image with a Z value of "4", for example. ).

  According to the above configuration, the effect image can be preferably displayed.

(3) Further, the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, uses a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28 or the like) to execute notification means (for example, The production execution informing operation control process of step S547 and the like are provided, and the informing means performs a specific production (for example, step 5 (SU5) of step-up preliminary production, group preliminary production, character production, etc.). It is possible to notify that the specific effect has been executed using an information image (for example, an effect execution notification image or the like), and the information image has a high priority (for example, as shown in FIG. 30). , Z values “1” to “3” are set in the performance execution notification image).

  According to the above configuration, the visibility of the information image can be improved.

(4) Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the effect execution means is displayed in conjunction with the operation of the first movable body (for example, movable body A). The first interlocking image using the first interlocking image (for example, the accessory effect effect image a) and the second interlocking image displayed in association with the operation of the second movable body (for example, the movable body B). (For example, the second interlocking effect using the accessory effect effect image b) can be executed, and the first interlocking image may be set with a priority different from that of the second interlocking image ( For example, different Z values may be set for the character effect effect image a and the character effect effect image b).

  According to the above configuration, the effect image can be preferably displayed.

(5) Further, in the gaming machine described in (4), the first interlocking image may be set to have the same priority as the second interlocking image (for example, as described above, The same Z value may be set for the character effect effect image a and the character effect effect image b).

  According to the above configuration, the effect image can be preferably displayed.

(6) Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5), the variable display means (for example, in the variable display start setting process) that variably displays the identification information (for example, decorative pattern). A process of setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern as a use pattern (step S532), a process of variably displaying a decorative pattern based on the effect control pattern set in the variable display effect process (step S542), and the like. Provided, the effect execution means is predetermined as an effect for informing whether or not the variable winning device (for example, the normal variable winning ball device 6B) is controlled in a state where the game medium is easy to win (for example, a high base state). A predetermined performance (for example, a predetermined performance image shown in FIG. 48B) and a predetermined performance performed in a predetermined performance process shown in FIG. 46. The predetermined effect image is set to have a higher image display priority than the identification information at least during the predetermined period during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. During variable display of the design, the predetermined effect image is displayed in a layer higher than the decorative design), and the priority of the image display is set lower than the identification information at least during the predetermined period during the stop display. It may be possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 48D, the predetermined effect image is displayed in a layer lower than the decorative pattern during the stop display of the decorative pattern).

  According to the above configuration, the effect image can be preferably displayed.

(7) Further, the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above uses a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 49, FIG. 53, etc.). An informing means (for example, a prize ball number informing operation control process in step S573, a cumulative award ball number informing operation control process in step S574, etc.) is provided for executing the informing, and the informing means includes a first value informing image (for example, The value (for example, the number of prize balls of the big hit) acquired in a specific period (the big hit game state of each time) by using the prize ball notification image and the like, and the second value notification image (for example, the cumulative prize ball). The amount of value (for example, the cumulative award ball of the jackpot in consecutive chans) obtained during a special period (for example, a jackpot gaming state in which the game is continuously transitioned to the normal state, etc.) using a number notification image etc. Number, etc.) The value notification image and the second value notification image may have different priorities set (for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (D), the award ball number notification image indicates the cumulative award ball number notification). (Z value different from the image is set).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably execute a plurality of notification effects.

(8) In addition, the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above uses a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIGS. 28, 49, 53, etc.). The notification means (for example, the error notification processing of step S75, the prize ball number notification operation control processing of step S573, the cumulative prize ball number notification operation control processing of step S574, etc.) for performing notification is provided. An error using the error notification image (for example, the error notification image shown in FIG. 28) and a value acquired using the value notification image (for example, the prize ball number notification image, the accumulated prize ball number notification image, etc.) (for example, , The number of prize balls, etc.), and the error notification image and the value notification image may have different priorities (for example, as shown in FIG. 49D). The error notification image shows the number of prize balls. It sets different Z values from the image and the cumulative prize cell count notification image).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably execute a plurality of notification effects.

(9) In addition, the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above uses a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIGS. 28, 49, 53, etc.). A notification means for executing notification (for example, the error notification processing in step S75, the probability variation confirmation notification operation control processing in step S575, etc.) is provided, and the notification means includes an error notification image (for example, the error notification image shown in FIG. 28). And the like, an error and a state notification image (for example, the probability variation confirmation notification image shown in FIG. 53, an image reporting that it becomes a high base, an image reporting that a specific fluctuation pattern table is referred to, etc.) ) Can be used to notify the state (for example, the fact that it is controlled to a probable state after the end of the big hit game state, or that it is controlled to a high base state after the end of the big hit game state, etc.), and an error notification image And state A priority order different from that of the known image may be set (for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), a Z value different from that of the probability variation confirmation notification image is set in the error notification image. Exist).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably execute a plurality of notification effects.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example etc of contents of production control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the game random number counted by the main board side. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of a variation category and a variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot type determination table. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. It is the figure which shows the constitution example and the like of production control pattern. It is a block diagram etc. which show the structural example of the data holding area for effect control. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of sensor error information processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the starting winning a prize decision processing in the special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart and the like showing an example of a random number determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a prefetch determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command analysis processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of error notification processing. It is a figure which shows an example of Z value etc. of various images. It is a figure which shows an example of various images. It is a figure which shows an example of various images. It is a conceptual diagram which represented the layer of various images typically. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is the flowchart which shows production control process treatment. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the winning a prize production decision processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining effect determination processing such as holding. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a production pattern such as a holding effect It is an explanatory view explaining a chance zone effect determination process. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination rate etc. of the presence or absence of execution of a main notice production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows an example of chance zone production operation control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of group notice production operation control processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production execution information operation control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a special figure hit waiting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the predetermined effect processing which performs the predetermined effect related to opening of a normal variable winning a prize sphere device. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a determination rate of whether or not to execute a predetermined effect. It is the explanation drawing which explains specified production operation control processing and the like. It is a figure which shows an example of Z value etc. of another image. It is a conceptual diagram etc. which represented the layer of various images typically. It is a conceptual diagram etc. which represented the layer of various images typically. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during a round. It is a figure which shows an example of Z value etc. of another image. It is a conceptual diagram etc. which represented the layer of various images typically.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention, showing a layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. On the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launch device and is driven into the game area.

  A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed to a normal open state in which the vertical position is set and an enlarged open state in which the tilted position is set by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) second start winning opening is formed. When the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "starting winning opening".

  As an example, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball passes through (enters) the second starting winning hole. It will be difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning port by the tilting control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is on. It will be in an enlarged open state where it is easy to enter.

  In addition, the normal variable winning ball device 6B allows the game ball to enter the second starting winning port even when it is in the normally open state, but it is more likely that the game ball will enter than when it is in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normal variable winning prize ball device 6B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second starting winning opening as the second starting area is in an enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), and a normal open state in which the game ball hardly passes (enters) or cannot pass (entry). Changes to.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG.

  It should be noted that game balls that have passed (entered) through the winning openings such as the starting winning openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and large winning openings (described later) are provided corresponding to the respective winning openings. What is detected by the switch (the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Of the "winning prizes", the winning of the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening) is referred to as the "starting winning", and in particular, the winning of the first starting winning opening is called the first starting winning. , The winning in the second starting winning opening is referred to as the second starting winning.

  Based on the occurrence of the first start prize (detection of the game ball by the first start opening switch 22A), a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as the prize ball, and the first special figure reserved memory number (described later). ) Is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the first special symbol game (described later) executed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the decorative symbol executed on the image display device 5 (described later) The first start condition (also referred to as the first execution condition) for executing the variable display game such as the variable display is satisfied.

  Further, based on the occurrence of the second start winning (detection of the game ball by the second start opening switch 22B), a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and the number of second special figure reserved storages. If (after-mentioned) is below a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), it is executed in the second special figure game (after-mentioned) and image display device 5 (after-mentioned) executed in the 2nd special symbol display device 4B. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a variable display of a decorative pattern is established. The number of prize balls paid out based on the first start prize and the number of prize balls paid out based on the second start prize may be the same or different from each other. Good.

  The first special figure hold storage number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start prize) that are not executed immediately when the first start prize is generated and are temporarily suspended for execution. Occurrence of the first starting prize even if the first starting condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) or the variable display of the decorative pattern is satisfied by the occurrence of the first starting prize. When the first start condition that allows the start of the variable display game described above is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that was previously satisfied is being executed, or the pachinko game is played). When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit game state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a waiting state). In other words, the first special figure reservation storage number is the number of variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning awaiting execution. The number of 1st special figure reservation storage decreases one by one whenever one 1st start condition is materialized.

  It should be noted that the variable display corresponding to the first starting prize is satisfied, although the first starting condition for the certain first starting prize is satisfied, but the first starting condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first starting prize is not satisfied. The information on (1) is stored (held) as suspension data (first special figure suspension information) until the first start condition that allows the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure reservation information is consumed one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game is executed based on the digested first special figure reservation information.

  The number of second special figure reservation storages is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start prize) that are temporarily not executed at the time of the occurrence of the second start prize and are temporarily suspended. Due to the occurrence of the second start prize, the occurrence of the second start prize even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of the decorative pattern is satisfied. When the second start condition that allows the above-mentioned variable display game to start is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that has been previously satisfied is being executed, or the pachinko machine is used). When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit game state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a waiting state). That is, the number of second special figure reservation storages is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning awaiting execution. The number of second special figure pending storage decreases by one each time one of the second start conditions is satisfied.

  It should be noted that the variable display corresponding to the second start prize is satisfied, although the second start condition for the certain second start prize is satisfied, but the second start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the second start prize is not satisfied. The information regarding (1) is stored (held) as suspension data (second special figure suspension information) until the second start condition that permits the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held second special figure suspension information is consumed one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested second special figure suspension information is executed.

  It should be noted that the number of reserved memories obtained by adding the number of first special figure reserved memories and the number of second special figure reserved memories is referred to as "total reserved memory number". When the first special figure pending storage number, the second special figure pending storage number, and the total pending storage number are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as the "special figure pending storage number" or the "pending storage number". That is, when simply referred to as “special figure reserved storage number” or “reserved storage number”, one or two of the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the total reserved storage number Or, it may refer to three. Further, when the first starting condition and the second starting condition are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “starting condition” or “execution condition”. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “start condition”. Further, the first special figure reservation information and the second special figure reservation information are simply referred to as “special figure reservation information” unless otherwise distinguished.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in a lower portion of the game area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball device 7 forms a large winning opening that changes between a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to open and close by, for example, a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the state of the special winning opening by opening and closing the special winning opening door. Change (open state, closed state).

  As an example, the special variable winning ball device 7 closes the special winning opening door to close the special winning opening when the solenoid 82 is off, and opens the special winning opening door when the solenoid 82 is on. And open the special winning opening. The game ball that has passed (entered) the special winning opening in the open state is detected by the count switch 23 shown in FIG. 2, for example. In other words, by opening the special winning opening, a prize is awarded to the special winning opening.

  Based on the occurrence of a prize in the special winning opening (detection of the game ball by the count switch 23), a predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. The number of prize balls paid out based on the occurrence of a prize in the special winning opening (for example, 12) is the number of prize balls paid out based on the occurrence of the first starting prize (for example, 3), and the second starting prize. The number is greater than the number of prize balls (for example, three) paid out based on the occurrence of. In other words, whether or not the state of the special winning opening (open state, closed state) is advantageous to the player is greatly influenced. That is, when the special winning opening is open, more prize balls can be expected than when the special winning opening is closed, so when the special winning opening is open, when the special winning opening is closed It is very advantageous to the player compared to.

  In addition to or instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter), a partially open state in which the game ball is hard to pass (enter) may be provided.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area on the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A is composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode) or the like. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A variably displays (variable display) a special symbol (also referred to as "special symbol") that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbols (special symbols) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols" or "special symbols 1", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. (Special drawing) is also referred to as "second special drawing" or "special drawing 2". A game executed with variable display of identification information (or a variable display of identification information itself) is called a variable display game. In particular, the variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. The (variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. In addition, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “special figure games”.

  The first special symbol display device 4A (similarly to the second special symbol display device 4B) has a plurality of types of numbers including "0" to "9" and "-" as a special figure game. Variable display of special symbols. A symbol number corresponding to each special symbol is attached to each special symbol. As an example, each of the numbers indicating "0" to "9" is given a symbol number of "0" to "9", and the symbol of "-" is given a symbol number of "10". Good. In addition, the special symbol is not limited to the one configured by the numbers indicating “0” to “9”, the symbol indicating “−”, and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E of the alphabet) with different combinations of what is turned on and what is turned off in the 7-segment LED are set in advance, and as special symbols. It may be displayed.

  In the right part of the game area on the game board 2 (the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B), the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B are provided. . The first hold indicator 25A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold storage number (the first special figure game hold number) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). The 1st hold display which displays possible is performed. For example, the 1st reservation indicator 25A displays the 1st special figure reservation memory number so that specification is possible by the number of LEDs to light. For example, if the number of holdings of the first special figure game is increased by one by the establishment of the new first starting condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the holding of the first special figure game is held by the establishment of the new first starting condition. If the number of lights decreases by one, the number of lights may be decreased by one. The expression "first hold display" is, as described above, an operation based on the first special figure hold information (LED lighting control of the first hold indicator 25A, the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL (described later)). Display control based on the first special figure reservation information (display by the LED of the first reservation display 25A, or display in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL (described later)) There is also. For example, the first hold display in the case where the first hold display is newly added to the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL (described later) indicates the newly added display itself. The same applies to the "second hold display" and the "active display" (described later).

  The second hold indicator 25B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold storage number (the hold number of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second hold display is displayed to enable display. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner by the number of LEDs to be turned on. For example, if the number of holdings of the second special figure game is increased by one by the establishment of the new second starting condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the holding of the second special figure game is held by the establishment of the new second starting condition. If the number of lights decreases by one, the number of lights may be decreased by one.

  In addition, when the first hold display and the second hold display are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “hold display”.

  On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, there are provided a passage gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a universal symbol reservation display device 25C. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of stored ordinary figures (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the normal symbol display 20 The universal figure starting condition for executing the universal figure game (described later) executed in step 1 is established.

  The normal symbol display device 20 is composed of 7-segment or dot-matrix LEDs and the like like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display device 20 variably displays (variable display) a normal symbol (also referred to as “general symbol” or “normal symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The variable display game in which the normal symbols are variably displayed is also referred to as a normal figure game (or "normal figure game"). Note that information related to a universal figure game in which the universal figure start condition is satisfied but the universal figure start condition (described later) is not stored is stored (held) as suspension data (general figure suspension information).

  The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves based on the hold data (public figure hold information), for example, by the number of LEDs to be turned on. The number of ordinary figure holding storages is the number of ordinary figure games which are not executed immediately when the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 and whose execution is temporarily held. Even if the universal figure starting condition for executing the universal figure game is established by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, the universal figure starting condition for permitting the start of the universal figure game is not established ( For example, when the previously established universal figure game is being executed), the execution of the relevant universal figure game is suspended (the relevant universal figure game is in a waiting state). That is, the number of public figure reservation storages is the number of game of the general figure game which is in the state of waiting for execution. The number of stored universal figure reservations decreases by one each time one universal figure start condition is satisfied.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative pattern display area is arranged. In the decorative pattern display area, a decorative pattern, which is a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each, is variably displayed. Variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (a special symbol game using the first special symbol), or a second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special figure game using the second special figure), a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative patterns is executed in the display area (decorative pattern display area).

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game (the first special figure game or the second special figure game), that is, in response to the start of the fluctuation of the special figure (the first special figure or the second special figure), the decorative pattern display In each of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of the decorative pattern (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Then, in response to the end of the special drawing game, that is, in response to the stop display of the special drawing, in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the decorative design that becomes the variable display result (the final design, the final design) (Also referred to as a stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. That is, in the display area (decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5, the variation of the decorative design is started in association with (corresponding to) the first special figure game (or the second special figure game). The fixed decorative design (also called the final stop design) is stopped and displayed. The decorative design corresponding to the decorative design display area 5L is also referred to as a left design, the decorative design corresponding to the decorative design display area 5C is designated as a middle design, and the decorative design corresponding to the decorative design display area 5R is also designated as a right design.

  The decorative pattern is composed of, for example, eight types of patterns (alphanumeric characters, Chinese numerals, English characters, figures, character images related to a predetermined motif, etc.). A symbol number corresponding to each decorative pattern is attached to each decorative pattern. As an example, each of the decorative symbols of alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" may be attached with each of the symbol numbers "1" to "8". The decorative design is not limited to eight types, and may be any type (for example, seven types or nine types).

  The variable display result of the special symbol (also referred to as the special symbol display result) is displayed to stop the fixed special symbol and terminate the variable display, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is the fixed decorative symbol (final stop). Stop display to stop the variable display and stop the variable display, and stop display to stop the variable display result of the normal symbol (also referred to as the general display result) and the fixed normal symbol to end the variable display. It is also referred to as a complete stop display, a final stop display, or a derived display (or simply “derived”). The variation start timing and variation end timing of the decorative symbol do not necessarily have to match the variation start timing and variation end timing of the special symbol, and within the variation time (special symbol variation time) of the special symbol, the ornament symbol It suffices if the fluctuation time of

  That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, and the variation end timing of the special symbol (stop display timing of the fixed special symbol) is the variation end timing of the decorative symbol (of the fixed symbol It may be later than the stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the fixed special symbol may be stopped and displayed at the end of the execution of the predetermined effect.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be displayed. For example, a temporary stop display may be performed in which the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative design is started and before the fixed decorative design is derived and displayed. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined effect (for example, a sliding effect (described later), a pseudo continuous effect (described later), a re-lottery effect (described later), etc.) is performed, a temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is performed. The temporary stop display of the decorative pattern may be performed as a part of the predetermined effect, or the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern may be performed along with the execution of the predetermined effect. That is, the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern may be considered to be a part of the predetermined effect, or may be considered to be different from the predetermined effect. In the temporary stop display, a decorative pattern whose fluctuation speed becomes “0” is displayed for a while, for example, while slightly shaking or expanding / contracting, or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). Includes those that stop and display without causing slight shaking, stretching, etc.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL and a second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR are arranged. In the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL, the first reserved display for displaying the first special figure reserved memory number in a identifiable manner is performed, as in the case of the first reserved indicator 25A. That is, the number of the first special figure games that are currently being executed is displayed so that they can be specified. In the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL, a second hold display for displaying the second special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner is performed, as with the second hold display 25B. That is, the number of the second special figure games that are currently being executed is displayed so that they can be specified.

  In the first start prize winning memory display area 5HL, for example, the first hold display may be performed right-justified. That is, when the number of holdings of the first special figure game increases due to the establishment of the new first starting condition, if there is no other first holding display in the first starting winning prize memory display area 5HL, the first starting winning prize memory display is displayed. On the right side of the area 5HL (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5), a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased first special figure hold information, and the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL is added. If there is another first hold display, the new first hold is displayed on the left side of the other first hold display (if there are a plurality of other first hold displays, further left of the leftmost first hold display). You may make it add a display. In addition, when there are a plurality of first hold indications in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and the hold number of the first special figure game decreases due to the establishment of the new first start condition, the first decrease The first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information is erased, Each of the other first hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

  Further, in the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR, for example, the second hold display may be performed by left-justifying. That is, when the number of holdings of the second special figure game is increased due to the establishment of the new second starting condition, if there is no other second holding display in the second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR, the second starting winning prize memory display is displayed. On the left side of the area 5HR (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5), a new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information, and the second start winning a prize memory display area 5HR is added. If there is another second hold display on the right side of the other second hold display (to the right of the rightmost second hold display if there are a plurality of other second hold displays), the new second hold display is displayed. You may make it add a display. In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold indications in the second start winning award memory display area 5HR and the hold number of the second special figure game decreases due to the establishment of the new second start condition, the second decrease The second hold display (the second hold display that has been displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning a prize memory display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information is erased, Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side).

  In addition, when the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "starting prize memory display area 5H".

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, an active display area (also referred to as a current display area, an active hold display area, an in-use display area, etc.) AHA is arranged. In the active display area, an active display (also referred to as a display at the time of digestion, a display at this time, etc.) is displayed based on the fact that the hold display is erased from the start winning prize memory display area 5H when the start condition is satisfied. For example, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold display displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL is moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA to display the active display, and the second start is displayed. When the condition is satisfied, the second hold display, which is displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning prize memory display area 5HR, is moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA and the active display is displayed. The display mode of the hold display immediately before moving (shifting) to the active display area AHA and the display mode of active display immediately after moving (shifting) to the active display area AHA may be different. That is, the display mode may change when shifting to the active display. Note that, hereinafter, an active display displayed based on the deletion of a certain hold display M may be referred to as an active display corresponding to the hold display M. That is, "corresponding" in "active display corresponding to the hold display" means that the active display takes over at least a part of the hold display when the variable display such as a decorative pattern is started by the disappearance of the hold display. Is displayed or displayed in a manner similar to the hold display (for example, when the same character is drawn).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the active display area AHA is arranged between the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL and the second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR as shown in FIG. The active display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 5.

  In the game area of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. Further, as the winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. You may be asked. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball that has entered one of the general winning openings has been detected by a predetermined general winning ball switch. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball as a game medium toward a game area. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hit ball operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor provided in the ball launch device, and a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls or the game balls lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be supplied (stored) to the ball striking device. An upper plate (ball hitting supply plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate is provided for holding (storing) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side on the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operation rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is applied when the player holds the operation rod). There is. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a push / pull operation with a predetermined operating finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 31A with an operating hand (for example, the left hand). It may be configured as follows. It suffices that a trigger sensor for detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation with respect to the trigger button is built in the operation rod.

  A tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operation rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the side of the player who faces the pachinko gaming machine 1. Pair) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) that are arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player's side. It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

  As a member forming the upper plate, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). It is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to be capable of mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detecting a predetermined instruction operation, such as a pressing operation by the player. A push sensor for detecting a player's operation performed on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  A voice output member is provided in the periphery of the game area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are provided at the left and right slanted lower parts of the upper plate (the left and right slanted upper parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR will be simply referred to as the speakers 8 unless otherwise distinguished. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs an effect sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the progress status of the game of the gaming machine 1, and outputs a warning sound according to the status of the gaming machine 1.

  The effect sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the effect sound is, for example, BGM or a song that is output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice (speech, message) that is output according to the detection result of the switch or the sensor (for example, the detection of the winning of the first starting winning opening or the like). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice, or the like that is output according to an operation action on the push button 31B. Since the operation act on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output according to the operation act on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice that is issued to request an operation action on the push button 31B, or a sound or a voice that notifies that the reach state (to be described later) shifts to the reach state. , A sound, a voice or the like that gives a notice or suggests that the jackpot game state will be entered before the jackpot game state is entered.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound output when the glass door (not shown) is open, and the like. .

  A movable accessory (movable body) that operates as an effect or a decoration is provided inside and around the game area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, from the first position (the initial position shown in FIG. 1) to the second position (the lower end position, for example, the position in front of the display area of the image display device 5) at the upper position of the image display device 5. A movable accessory 17 that can be moved up to is provided.

  In addition, a light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the game area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the movable member 17 is provided with the light emitting member 9CC, the image display device 5 is provided with the light emitting members 9CL and 9CR at the left and right positions, and the light emitting member is provided at the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. 9U, a light emitting member 9SL and a light emitting member 9SR are installed at the left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. Hereinafter, when the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are not particularly distinguished, they are collectively referred to as the lamp 9. The lamp 9 may be composed of, for example, one or more LEDs, or may be composed of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotating lamp (for example, a patrol lamp) having a rotating portion. In addition to the above, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the like) in the game area.

  The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the movable accessory 17 described above are effect devices that perform effects, but the gaming machine 1 has other effects such as a device having a vibrating unit and a device having a blower unit. A device may be provided.

  The arrangement position (installation position) of each component is an example, and may be arranged at another position. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the universal figure hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the general figure display 20 starts the general figure game based on the establishment of the general figure start condition after the general figure start condition has been established. In the normal figure game, after starting the variable display of the normal symbol (after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol), when the predetermined time that is the normal symbol change time has elapsed, the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol Is stopped (displayed). At this time, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per symbol”. On the other hand, as the fixed ordinary symbol, for example, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol, such as a number or a symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the regular symbol is "ordinary symbol loss". Become. Corresponding to the fact that the variable display result of the ordinary symbol is "universal symbol", the expansion and opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing pieces of the electric tulip constituting the normally variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position. When a predetermined time elapses, the normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure game (first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the first start condition being satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied, and the second Based on that the second start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, the special figure game (second special figure game) by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the fluctuation of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special figure change time elapses, the variable display result of the special symbol is determined. Derivatively display the design (results of special figure display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as the specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, " It becomes "miss". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the predetermined display result may be “small hit”.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are the big hit symbols, and the special symbols indicating the “−” symbols are the losing symbols. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and a lost symbol is a special symbol different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, the special symbols common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol and a lost symbol.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit game state which is a specific game state. In the big hit game state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 controls the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state. The big hit game state in which the special winning opening is controlled to an open state is an example of an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Further, after the variable display result in the special drawing game becomes "small hit", the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to a small hit game state which is a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 sets a predetermined round (also referred to as “round game”) that is advantageous to the player in the big hit game state after the variable display result in the special drawing game becomes “big hit”. The number of times (predetermined number of rounds). The round is the opening cycle of the special winning opening. In each round (each round), the pachinko gaming machine 1 opens and closes the special winning opening door of the special variable winning prize ball device 7 to change the state of the special winning opening (open state, closed state). For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 opens the special winning opening door at the start of the round, changes the special winning opening from a closed state to an open state, maintains the special winning opening in an open state, and then closes the special winning opening door. The special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state to end one round.

  It should be noted that instead of opening the special winning opening door immediately and opening the special winning opening from the closed state to the open state at the start of the round, the special winning opening is closed immediately without opening the special winning opening door. The mode may be maintained, and then the special winning opening door may be opened to change the special winning opening from the closed state to the open state. At the end of the round, instead of closing the special winning opening door and changing the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state, closing the special winning opening door and changing the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state It may be a mode in which the round is ended after that.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the special winning opening to the open state once in each round (changes the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state during one round). The pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the special winning opening to the open state a plurality of times in one round. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the special winning opening to the open state twice per round (the big winning opening is opened → closed → open → closed during one round). It may change with the state).

  In the jackpot gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 repeatedly executes the round until the number of times of executing the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number. It should be noted that the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes the round due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a game ball does not win the special winning opening) even before the number of times of executing the round reaches a predetermined upper limit. May end.

  Note that the predetermined upper limit number may be one type (for example, 10 times at all times) or may be a plurality of types. For example, the predetermined upper limit number may be any number selected (lottery) from a plurality of types (for example, 2, 8, 16 times).

  In the round, the special winning opening has a condition that either a predetermined upper limit opening time elapses after the special winning opening door is opened, or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winnings to the special winning opening occur. It is kept open until it is established. The predetermined upper limit opening time may be one type (for example, 29 seconds at all times) or may be a plurality of types. For example, the predetermined upper limit opening time may be any time selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 0.1 seconds and 29 seconds).

  In the round, the special winning opening is maintained in a closed state (closed state in the round) until a predetermined time (closed period) elapses. For example, in the case of the mode in which the special winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state and the round starts, the special winning opening is set until a predetermined time (closing period) elapses after the special winning opening door is closed. Keep closed for a period of time. Further, for example, in the case of a mode in which the round starts while keeping the special winning opening in the closed state, the special winning opening is in the closed state until a predetermined time (closed period) elapses after the start of the round. Maintained. The predetermined time (closed period) may be one type (for example, always 3 seconds) or may be a plurality of types. For example, the predetermined time (closed period) may be any time selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of time (for example, 1 second, 3 seconds).

  From the above, in the jackpot gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes, for example, eight rounds each of which changes the special winning opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds), or opens the special winning opening. Each round that changes from state (29 seconds) to closed state (3 seconds) is executed 16 times, or the special winning opening is opened (0.1 seconds) → closed (1 second) → opened (0.1 seconds) It is possible to execute each round twice, changing from (second) to closed state (1 second). Further, in the big hit game state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes the round for changing the large winning opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds) eight times, and then opens the large winning opening (0. Each round that changes from 1 second) to a closed state (1 second) can be executed 8 times.

  Of the rounds in the jackpot game state, a round whose upper limit opening time is relatively long (for example, a round whose opening state is 29 seconds) is also called a normal opening round, and a round whose upper limit opening time is relatively short (for example, opening). A round whose state is 0.1 second) is also called a short-term open round.

  In addition, among the special symbols which are the big hit symbols, the big hit symbols corresponding to the normal opening round (the big hit symbols controlled in the big hit game state in which the normal opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the normal opening round big hit symbols. . Of the special symbols that are big hit symbols, the big hit symbol corresponding to the short-term open round (the big hit symbol controlled in the big hit game state in which the short-term open round is executed later) may be referred to as the short-term open round big hit symbol.

  In the big hit game state (normal open big hit state) which is controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the normal open round is executed a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). Also, in the jackpot gaming state (short-term open jackpot state) that is controlled after the short-term open-round jackpot symbol is derived as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the short-term open round is executed a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). It If the normal open jackpot state is executed more times in the normal open jackpot state than in the short-term open jackpot state, the short-term open round is executed in addition to the normal open round in the normal open jackpot state. In the jackpot state, the normal opening round may be executed in addition to the short-term opening round.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a jackpot gaming state that is controlled after the variable display result in the special drawing game becomes "big hit", that is, the value that the player obtains in each jackpot gaming state, that is, the game. It is possible to prepare (realize) various jackpot game states in which the degree of advantage seen by the player (for example, the number of prize balls (the number of winning balls)) is different.

  As an example of the case where the short-term open round is not used, the player is more advantageous than the jackpot game state in which the round (normally open round) is executed eight times and the jackpot game state in which the round (normally open round) is executed eight times. It is possible to prepare a jackpot gaming state in which (normally open round) is executed 16 times. In the above example, if there is no difference in the number of times the special winning opening is changed to the open state in each round (normal opening round) or the time of each opening state (opening time), the round (normal opening round) is set. In the big hit game state of being executed 16 times, it is possible to expect twice the number of payouts as in the big hit game state of executing the round (normally open round) 8 times.

  As an example of the case where the short-term open round is used, rather than the big hit game state where the short-term open round is executed 8 times after the normal open round is executed 8 times (actual 8 round big hit game state) and the real 8 round big hit game state It is possible to prepare a jackpot gaming state in which a normally open round is executed 16 times, which is advantageous for the player. In the above example, there is no difference in the number of times the special winning opening is changed to the open state in each normal opening round, and the time of each open state (opening time), and the number of coins obtained in the short opening round If the number is small enough to be ignored, in the big hit game state where the normal open round is executed 16 times, it is possible to expect twice as many balls as the big hit game state of substantially 8 rounds.

  Also, even if the maximum opening time has not elapsed after opening the special winning opening door, if the predetermined number of winnings to the special winning opening occur, the special winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state. The value obtained by the player may be different by providing a difference in the predetermined number. For example, a jackpot game state in which the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds) is executed 8 times with the predetermined number being 5, and a normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds) is set with 5 being the predetermined number. A big hit game state in which the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds) in which the predetermined number is 10 is executed eight times, which is more advantageous to the player than the big hit game state in which it is executed, may be prepared.

  Further, the value obtained by the player may be made different by providing a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of the winning in the special winning opening. For example, the player is more advantageous than the big hit game state in which the normal open round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times, and the big hit game state in which the normal open round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times, You may prepare the big hit game state which performs 16 times the normal opening round which made the number of prize balls 12 pieces.

  Further, in addition to the value that the player obtains by the jackpot gaming state itself (the value that the player obtains in the period of the jackpot gaming state), the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the jackpot gaming state, Value obtained by the player after the jackpot gaming state by changing the length of the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the jackpot gaming state (for example, shortening times, ST times), etc. May be different.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled after the 8R certainty variation jackpot (described later) is set as the jackpot gaming state that is controlled after the variable display result in the special drawing game becomes "big hit". A big hit game state in which the normal open round is executed 8 times and a big hit game state in which the normal open round is controlled 16 times after the 16R probability variation big hit (described later) is prepared are prepared.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In response to the start of one of the special drawing games among the games, the variable display of the decorative design is started. In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative pattern is changed to a specific variable during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the end of the variable display by the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern. There may be a predetermined reach state that constitutes a part of the display combination.

  The reach state is a decorative pattern which is not stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination (also referred to as a “reach variation pattern”). Is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or some of the decorative patterns are synchronized and change while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. In the following description, reaching the reach state is also referred to as reaching the reach (establishing the reach).

  In addition, in response to the reach state, the changing speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative pattern, or changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, a staging operation different from that before the reach state is executed. May be done. The production operation such as the display of the character image and the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach production (or reach production display). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the voice output operation by the speaker 8, the light emitting operation of the lamp 9 (turning off, blinking, lighting, etc.) and the operation of the movable accessory 17 (stationary, (Fine movement, movement, etc.) may be included as an operation mode different from the operation mode before the reach state.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of kinds of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the effect pattern, the possibility that the big hit combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect (also referred to as “big hit expectation” or “big hit reliability”) may be different. As a result, the jackpot expectation can be changed depending on which of the plural types of reach effects is executed, that is, which reach effect is to appear. As an example, in the present embodiment, a reach mode of normal reach and a reach mode of super reach, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach, are preset (prepared).

  In addition, the jackpot expectation degree by a certain effect is, for example, (probability that the effect is executed at the time of a big hit) × (probability of being a big hit) / {(probability of that effect being performed at the time of a big hit) × (probability of being a big hit) + (Probability that the effect is executed except when the big hit) x (probability that the big hit does not occur)}. In addition, when a certain effect is executed and a "big hit" is always generated, the big hit expectation degree of the effect is "1". The same applies to the degree of expectation of super reach by a certain production.

  Further, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, as one mode of the variable display effect, it is possible to execute a sliding effect or a pseudo continuous effect realized by a variable display operation of the decorative pattern or the like. The sliding effect is an effect in which, in one special drawing game, the decorative design is temporarily stopped and then re-variably displayed in a part of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Alternatively, the effect is to temporarily change the display of all the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then re-variably display a part of the temporarily displayed decorative patterns. According to the sliding effect, it is possible to change the temporarily stopped display of the decorative design to another design, so that the non-reach state can be made to reach.

  Pseudo-sequential production is, once in a special drawing game, temporarily or temporarily displaying the decorative design in part or all of the decorative design display area 5L, 5C, 5R, and then re-variably displaying the decorative design temporarily displayed. It is a production to make. The re-variable display in the pseudo continuous effect can be performed a plurality of times (for example, up to four times) for one special figure game.

  The number of times of re-variable display (re-variable display number) in the pseudo continuous production is the number of times of variable display (first variable display) until all the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are first temporarily stopped ( (1 time), the number of times of re-variable display (final variable display) after all the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped (1 time), and the number of re-variable display between the first variable display and the last variable display X ( X is 0 or 1 or more), and is grasped as the number of times (X + 1) that is one less than the number of times (X + 2). Further, the number of times of revariable display is the same as the number of times (temporary stop number) in which all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Further, the number of times of re-variable display in the pseudo continuous effect is also referred to as the pseudo continuous number (or the pseudo continuous variation number). That is, the pseudo continuous number, the revariable display number, and the temporary stop number are the same. It should be noted that the increase in the number of pseudo-repetitions such as the first time, the second time, the third time, ... Is also referred to as “the pseudo-reaction continues”.

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", the variable design is changed based on that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the re-variable display (re-change) once to four times. The display can be made to appear as if it was started two to five times in a row. Although the present embodiment shows an example in which the revariable display (revariation) is performed once or twice (see FIG. 5), the revariable display (revariation) may be performed three times or more.

  In addition, the pseudo continuous production may be performed before the reach is established, or may be performed after the reach is established. That is, in the pseudo continuous effect, the temporary stop display may be performed before the reach state is reached, or the temporary stop display may be performed after the reach state is reached.

  The sliding effect (similarly to the pseudo continuous effect) is a notification or suggestion to the player that any one of the reach effects, a certain reach effect may be executed, or the jackpot expectation is high. Good. Hereinafter, an effect that gives advance notice or suggests to the player that any one of the reach effects or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the jackpot expectation degree is high may be collectively referred to as an announcement effect.

  It should be noted that a variable display effect (variable display operation) different from the sliding effect or the pseudo continuous effect may be executed as the notice effect. For example, fluctuation start timing (for example, when the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol start to fluctuate at the same time, the timing to start the fluctuation at the same time, and when the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol do not simultaneously fluctuate For the first time, the effect of changing the pattern that starts to change first) is different from the normal time, and the effect of changing the start order of the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern to be different from the normal time May be executed as Further, a display operation other than the variable display operation may be executed as the notice effect. For example, an effect that makes the background image different from the normal time or an effect that makes the hold display different from the normal time may be executed as the notice effect. Further, the notice effect may be based on an operation other than the display operation. For example, the notice effect may be a sound output from the speaker 8, a light emission of the lamp 9, an operation of the movable accessory 17, or the like.

  It should be noted that the notification (notice, suggestion) by the notice effect may be performed before the player recognizes whether or not the notice content is realized. For example, the notice effect that notifies the possibility of the reach state may be performed before the reach state (or the non-reach state). Further, the notice effect that notifies the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" may be performed before the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed.

  The notice effect may include a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as “preliminary determination notice effect”). The pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the variable display result of the variable display is a "big hit" before starting the variable display subject to the notice, based on the special drawing game hold information and the like. (Pre-reading) is a notice effect that is executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the prefetch notice presentation is called the target hold information, the hold display corresponding to the target hold information is called the target hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is displayed. It is also called a variable display of the target. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed while the target hold information is being consumed (when the target hold information is being consumed including variable display of the target) and before the target hold information. There is a case where it is executed while the pending information is being consumed, a case where the target pending information is being consumed, and a case where the pending information prior to the target pending information is being digested.

  As the pre-reading notice effect, a hold effect in a display mode of the first hold display in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and the second hold display in the second start prize winning memory display area 5HR may be prepared. The hold effect includes a first hold display added to the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL when the first start winning occurs and a second hold display added to the second start winning prize memory display area 5HR when the second starting prize occurs. Is displayed in the notice mode (additional hold effect), and the already displayed first hold display and second hold display are changed to the notice mode (including a change from a certain notice mode to another notice mode. , The same), or an effect to be executed when the first hold display or the second hold display changes to the notice mode, and the character or the like is directly displayed on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5. Effect (holding effect) that is operated indirectly or indirectly, and is an effect that is executed when the first hold display or the second hold display does not change to the notice mode, and a character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. on hold Shown directly or indirectly effect to act on (hold action Gase effect) may be included, such as. It should be noted that when the hold action effect is executed, the display mode of the first hold display (or the second hold display), which is the action target, changes, but when the hold action gasse effect is executed, the first hold display (or The display mode of the (second hold display) does not change.

  Further, as the notice effect, an active display effect in the display mode of the active display in the active display area AHA may be prepared. In the active display effect, an effect for displaying an active display to be added to the active display area AHA in a notice mode (active display effect at the time of addition) or an already displayed active display is changed to a notice mode (from a certain notice mode to another notice mode). A change to the notice mode is also included. Hereinafter, the same effect) (active display change effect), or an effect executed when the active display changes to the notice mode, in which a character or the like is activated in the display area of the image display device 5. An effect that directly or indirectly acts on the display (active display effect effect), or an effect that is executed when the active display does not change to the notice mode, and the character or the like is activated in the display area of the image display device 5. Includes productions that directly or indirectly act (active display action, gasse production), etc. Good. It should be noted that when the active display action effect is executed, the display mode of the active display, which is the operation target, changes, but when the active display action goose effect is executed, the display mode of the active display does not change.

  The display mode of the active display in the active display effect may be determined before the change (for example, at the time of starting winning) or may be determined at the time of the change. Further, the holding effect and the active display effect may be collectively referred to as an effect such as holding.

  As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not changed to the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed decorative design that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is called a “non-reach” (also called “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “miss”.

  As a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, when the special symbol which is a lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the decorative symbol is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-miss combination may be stopped and displayed. The variable display result of such a decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "miss".

  In the present embodiment, as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a special symbol indicating the number "3" among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers "3", "5", "7") which are jackpot symbols. When the symbol or the special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed, it is "8R probability variation big hit" which is one mode of "big hit". Further, when the special symbol indicating the number "7" is stopped and displayed, it is "16R probability variation big hit" which is one mode of "big hit". The round controlled when the 8R certainty variation jackpot or the 16R certainty variation jackpot is normally an open round. That is, in the present embodiment, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are normally open round jackpot symbols.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed, the 8R probability variation jackpot is obtained, but when the special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed. The 2R certainty variation jackpot (also referred to as the “probability”) in which the short-term open round is executed may be performed. In this case, the special symbol indicating the number “5” is a short-term open round jackpot symbol (also referred to as a sudden probability symbol). In the "big hit", "8R certainty variation big hit", "16R certainty variation big hit", and "2R certainty variation big hit" are referred to as "big hit type".

  In the case of 16R probability variation big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the reach state is reached, and the predetermined reach effect is obtained. After the execution, etc., the fixed decorative design which is a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. One example of a jackpot combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot is a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight horizontal line) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the same decorative symbol with an odd number. 3 in a row (that is, "1", "1", "1" in a row, "3", "3", "3" in a row, "5", "5", " "5", "7", "7", "7").

  In the case of the 8R probability variable big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number "3" or "5" is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the reach state is reached. After the reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative design which is a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. An example of a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable big hit is one in which three identical decorative patterns having an even number are arranged on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R ( That is, those lined up with "2", "2", "2", those lined up with "4", "4", "4", those lined up with "6", "6", "6", "8", "8", and "8").

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the 2R certainty variation big hit is not provided, but when the 2R certainty variation big hit is provided, in the case of the 2R certainty variation big hit, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and the reach state is set to reach the predetermined reach. After the effect is executed, or without reaching the reach state, the fixed decorative design which is a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variable big hit may be stopped and displayed. An example of a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variable big hit is a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, which has an odd design number and a different decorative design (at least one out of three). Items with three different decorative patterns (eg, "1", "3", "5", "3", "5", "7", "5", "5", "7") ”) And a combination including a predetermined decorative pattern (for example, a combination of“ 1 ”,“ probability ”,“ 2 ”, etc.).

  In addition, in the special drawing game, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the fixed decorative design which is a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R sure change big hit is stopped and displayed, and the 8R sure change is apparent on the surface. There may be a case where a fixed decorative design which is a combination of big hits is displayed in a stopped state.

  Based on the fact that the 16R probability variation jackpot has been reached, the normal release round is controlled to a normal release jackpot state that is executed 16 times (rounds), and after that, probability variation control (stochastic variation control) together with time reduction control (time reduction control) ) Is done. Further, based on the fact that the 8R probability variation big hit has been reached, the normal release round is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state in which it is executed eight times (rounds), and after that, the probability variation control is performed together with the time saving control.

  By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” in each special drawing game is improved so as to be higher than that when the probability variation control is not performed. The probability variation control is performed when the special figure game of a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as the probability variation number) is executed after the jackpot gaming state is ended, or when the variable display result is “big hit”. Ends when is first established. Therefore, even if the variable display result is not "big hit" while the probability variation control is being performed, if the special figure game with the predetermined number of STs (the probability variation number) is exhausted, the probability variation control is finish. The predetermined ST count is 70 times, for example.

  Further, by performing the time saving control, the variable display time of the special symbol in the special drawing game (special time variation time) is shortened as compared with the case where the time saving control is not performed. The time saving control is performed when one of the conditions that the special-drawing game is executed a predetermined number of times and the variable display result becomes "big hit" after the big hit gaming state is satisfied first. To end. Therefore, even when the variable display result is not "big hit" while the time saving control is being performed, the time saving control ends when the special figure game of a predetermined time saving time is exhausted. The predetermined number of times to save time is, for example, 70 times.

  When the time saving control is performed, the control for making the variation time of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary game by the ordinary symbol display device 20 (the ordinary symbol variation time) shorter than the time when the time saving control is not performed, or the ordinary symbol game of each time is ordinary. A control for improving the probability that the variable display result of the pattern is “universal figure” as compared with the case where the time saving control is not performed, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on that the variable display result is “universal figure” The game ball is the second start winning prize, such as the control to make the tilting control time to control the tilting of the movable wing piece longer than that when the time saving control is not performed, and the control to increase the number of times of tilting as compared to when the time saving control is not performed. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by making it easier to pass (enter) through the mouth and increasing the possibility that the second starting condition will be satisfied. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the player to enter the game ball into the second start winning port with the time saving control is advantageous for the player, and is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the enlarged opening state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the next variable display result is obtained. The time until it becomes a "big hit" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also called a time saving state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a high probability state or a probability variation state. The time saving state (high base state) and the high certainty state (certain variation state) are examples of advantageous states advantageous to the player.

  A gaming state in which time reduction control and high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control, that is, a gaming state that is a highly accurate state (probability variation state) and a high base state (time reduction state) is a highly accurate high base state or a probability variation state with time reduction. Also called. A gaming state in which only probability variation control is performed and time saving control or high opening control is not performed, that is, a gaming state that is a highly accurate state (probability variation state) but not a high base state (time saving state) is a highly accurate low base state. Or it is also called a time-short indeterminate change state. It should be noted that only the highly accurate and high base state (probably changed state with time saving) may be referred to as “probably changed state”. The gaming state in which the time saving control and the high opening control are performed without the probability variation control being performed, that is, the gaming state which is not the highly accurate state (the probability variation state) but is the high base state (time saving state) is also called the low certainty high base state. To be done. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is not performed and neither the time saving control nor the high opening control is performed, that is, the gaming state that is neither the highly accurate state (probability variation state) nor the high base state (time saving state) is also called the low accuracy low base state. To be done. The low-probability low-base state is a normal state in which neither probable variation control, time saving control, nor high-open control is performed. It may be referred to as "normal state". Note that the gaming state that is not the jackpot gaming state may be referred to as the "normal state", in distinction from the jackpot gaming state. The initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the state after the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on as in the case of system reset) is a normal state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal open big hit state is controlled based on whether the 8R certainty variation big hit or the 16R certainty variation big hit is reached, and after the end, a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times), a highly accurate high base. Controlled by the state.

  In the present embodiment, the short-time count and the ST count (probability change count) after the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) are the same (both 70 times), but the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R The number of times of shortening and the number of times of ST (probability variation number) after the probability variation big hit may be different. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of STs after the 8R certainty variation jackpot (probability variation number) and the number of STs after the 16R certainty variation jackpot (probability variation number) are the same (both 70 times). The number of STs after a big hit (probability change count) and the number of STs after a 16R sure change big hit (probability change count) may be different. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of shortening times after the 8R certainty variation jackpot is the same as the number of times saving after the 16R certainty variation jackpot (both 70 times), but the number of shortening times after the 8R certainty variation jackpot is achieved. And the 16R probability variation jackpot may be different from the number of shorter working hours after the jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the 2R certainty variation jackpot is not provided, but when the 2R certainty variation jackpot is provided, the short-term opening round is executed twice (round) based on the 2R certainty variation jackpot. After the control is performed in the state, the probability variation control may be performed together with the time saving control, as in the case of the 16R probability variation big hit or the 8R probability variation big hit.

  In the present embodiment, even when the variable display result is not “big hit” while the probability variation control is being performed, when the special figure game with a predetermined number of STs (probability variation number) is exhausted, Although the probability variation control ends, the probability variation control may not be terminated until the variable display result becomes “big hit” without providing the ST number (probability variation number). That is, a probability variation big hit for continuing the probability variation control until the next big hit may be provided. When providing the probability variation big hit which continues probability variation control until it becomes the next big hit, you may make it further provide the normal big hit which does not perform probability variation control after completion. For example, the normal open round is controlled to the normal open jackpot state in which it is executed eight times (rounds), and after that, the probability variation control is not performed (the time saving control and the high open control may or may not be performed. ), 8R normal big hit may be provided.

  In addition, the probability variation control is ended when the "probability variation falling" decision is made to end the highly accurate state in the probability variation falling lottery executed every time the special figure game is started after the jackpot gaming state is finished. You may In such a mode, the probability variation falling lottery is not performed until the special figure game having the predetermined ST number (probability variation number) is exhausted, and after the special figure game having the predetermined ST number (probability variation number) is exhausted. You may make it perform a probability variation fall lottery in each game. The same applies to the time saving control and the high opening control.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed for the decorative pattern. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after the temporary stop display of the decorative patterns that are a combination of the big hits corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hits, the same decorative patterns are changed again in a state of being aligned. Alternatively, any one of a decorative pattern which is a jackpot combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit and a decoration pattern which is a jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot may be finally stopped and displayed as a confirmed decoration pattern. In the present embodiment, the 2R certainty variation big hit is not provided, but when the 2R certainty variation big hit is provided, the same applies to the case where the decorative design which is the big hit combination corresponding to the 2R certainty variation big hit is temporarily stopped.

  In addition, after the fixed decorative design which is a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable big hit is derived and displayed, the period until the eighth round is finished (or after the end of the eighth round, the next variable display game is In the period until the start), the round number promotion effect for notifying that the big hit is the 16R probability variation big hit may be executed. In the present embodiment, the 2R certainty variation big hit is not provided, but when the 2R certainty variation big hit is provided, the same is true when the fixed decorative design which is the big hit combination corresponding to the 2R certainty variation big hit is derived and displayed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal big hit is not provided, but after the fixed decorative pattern that is a big hit combination corresponding to the normal big hit is derived and displayed, the period until the final round is finished ( Alternatively, after the end of the final round, until the next variable display game is started), the probability variation promotion effect for notifying that the jackpot is the probability variation jackpot may be executed.

  In addition, the promotion effect executed during the round (round number promotion effect, probability variation promotion effect) is referred to as big hit medium promotion effect (big hit medium round number promotion effect, big hit medium probability variation promotion effect), and after the final round ends. The promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability variation promotion effect) executed may be referred to as ending promotion effect (ending round number promotion effect, ending probability variation promotion effect).

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special drawing game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12 or the like. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of the command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by turning on / off / coloring the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that captures detection signals from various switches for detecting a game ball and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 or the like for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and then displays the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling the effect operation by 9 and the movable accessory 17 are mounted.

  The voice control board 13 is a control board for voice output control, which is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs audio from the speaker 8 based on a command or control data from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is installed. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control, which is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and controls the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp 9 or the like based on a command or control data from the effect control board 12. It has a built-in lamp driver circuit. The accessory control board 16 is a control board for controlling accessory operation provided separately from the effect control board 12, and drives the movable accessory 17 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A circuit for outputting a drive signal is mounted on an actuator (not shown).

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main substrate 11. The gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have any configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as what is called a sensor. If In addition to the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the gaming machine 1 similarly includes other switches (for example, a glass door (not shown) connected to the main board 11). ) Switch for detecting the open / closed state, a switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting unauthorized vibration, a switch for detecting unauthorized electromagnetic waves). Further, on the main board 11, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display device 20, the first holding display device 25A, the second holding display device 25B, the public figure holding display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the effect control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals forming the effect control command may be one, or may be three or more. Good.

  In addition, the information which comprises each production | generation control command may be memorize | stored in the command table in ROM101, for example. When a certain production control command is transmitted to the production control board 12, as a setting for transmitting the production control command, the storage address of the production control command in the command table is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The data may be stored in the created buffer area. Thereafter, the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed, and thus the effect control command set as described above is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Transmitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3 (A), the command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command that specifies fluctuation start in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command that designates variation start in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern that is variably displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special drawing game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for notifying a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3 (B), the determination result or the big hit type whether the variable display result is “miss”, “16R certainty variation big hit” or “8R certainty variation big hit” Different EXT data is set according to the determination result of.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation designating command for designating a confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also called "fanfare command") that designates the display of the effect image showing the start of the big hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening, which notifies that the special winning opening is in the closed state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the special winning opening opening notification command and the special winning opening opening notification command, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of times the round is executed (for example, "1" to "16") in the normal opening jackpot state or the short-term opening jackpot state. Is set.

  The command B100H is the first special prize based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the first starting winning occurs. It is a first start mouth prize notification command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the first special figure game by the symbol display device 4A is satisfied (first start mouth prize designation command, first start mouth prize time) Sometimes called a command).

  The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the second starting winning is generated. It is a second start mouth prize notification command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B is established (second start mouth prize designation command, second start mouth prize) Sometimes called a command).

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the first special figure reserved storage number such that it can be specified in the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL or the like. . The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number in the second starting prize winning storage display area 5HR or the like so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified.

  For example, when the first start prize is generated (when the first special figure reservation storage number is increased), the first start storage prize notification command is transmitted as the reservation storage information together with the first starting mouth prize notification command. In addition, when the second start winning is generated (when the second special figure reservation storage number is increased), the second starting storage prize notification command and the second reservation storage number notification command are transmitted as the reservation storage information. In addition, when the first start prize is generated, the second hold memory number notification command may be transmitted in addition to the first start mouth prize notification command and the first reserve memory number notification command, or the second start prize is generated. In this case, the first reserved memory number notification command may be transmitted in addition to the second start opening winning combination notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command. In addition, when the number of the first special figure reservation memory (or the number of the second special figure reservation memory) is increased, the first start prize memory display area 5HL (or the second start prize memory display area 5HR) is displayed first. A first reserved storage number addition specification command (or a second reserved storage number addition specification command) that specifies addition of the special figure reserved storage number (second special figure reserved storage number) is transmitted, and the first special figure reserved storage number ( Alternatively, when the second special figure reserved storage number) decreases, a first reserved storage number subtraction designation command (or second pending instruction) that designates subtraction of the first special figure reserved storage number (or second special figure reserved storage number) The memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of or in addition to the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. Further, a total reserved storage number addition designation command (total reserved storage number subtraction designation command) for designating addition (or subtraction) of the total reserved storage number may be transmitted.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. The command C4XXH is a symbol designating command showing the determination result of whether or not the variable display result is "big hit" as a result of winning determination, and the determination result of the big hit type. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category designation command (also referred to as variation category command) indicating a determination result as to whether or not the variation category is a variation category corresponding to a specific pattern (described later) as a winning determination result. The variation category is also referred to as a variation pattern type, and is a name when the variation patterns of decorative patterns are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including variation patterns of one or more decorative patterns that are categorized into a common group.

  In the present embodiment, in the random number determination process at the time of winning (FIG. 16), when the starting winning occurs, except for some cases (when there is the first starting winning in the high base state etc.), for the variation category determination. Based on the random number value MR3 of, it is determined whether the variation category is a variation category corresponding to a specific pattern (described later). Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control is performed for transmission to the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 superimposes the variable display based on the start prize based on the value set in the variation category command transmitted from the main board 11 when the start prize is generated. It can be recognized whether or not

  In addition, for the effect control commands such as the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command, the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 17, etc.). Used when doing. Hereinafter, the effect control command used to control the display operation in the image display device 5 is also referred to as a display control command, the effect control command used to control the audio output operation by the speaker 8 is also referred to as an audio control command, and the lamp 9 The effect control command used to control the light emitting operation is also referred to as a lamp control command, and the effect control command used to control the operation of the movable accessory 17 is also referred to as an accessory control command. It should be noted that among the effect control commands, there are those related to a plurality of effect devices, such as those that are a display control command, a voice control command, a lamp control command, and a accessory control command. Good.

  The command D0XX is a special winning opening winning notification command (also sometimes referred to as a special winning opening winning designation command) for notifying that a game ball has been won in the special winning opening. The special winning opening winning notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, when the game ball passes through the special winning opening.

  The command E0XX is a magnetic abnormality notification designating command that specifies to notify that a magnetic abnormality has occurred. For example, a magnet sensor (not shown, also referred to as a magnetic sensor) is provided on the back surface of a predetermined area of the game area 2, and the magnetic abnormality notification designating command is issued when the magnet sensor detects an abnormality (a magnet sensor indicating an abnormal value). When a signal is input), it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The magnet sensor detects an abnormality when, for example, there is an act of illegally guiding a game ball to a winning opening using a magnet. As a method for detecting magnetic anomaly, the reference value may be kept constant to detect the abnormal value, or the magnetic value at power-on may be used as the reference value to detect the abnormal value.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a program for game control to perform a control operation, and numerical data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 to read fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data to the RAM 102 to temporarily store various data, and the CPU 103 writes various floating data to the RAM 102. The CPU 103 stores various data to be temporarily stored in the RAM 102. A variable data read operation for reading out, a receiving operation in which the CPU 103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and a CPU 103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. And a transmission operation for outputting various signals are also performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, a random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, and a general figure. Numerical value data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

  The random number circuit 104 may be any one that counts the numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. 8, to update various numerical data by software, thereby random number values MR1 to MR1. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  Next, the variation pattern of the decorative design will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" is referred to as "loss variation pattern". The loss variation pattern corresponds to the "non-reach variation pattern (" non-reach variation pattern "" non-reach "when the variable display result of the variable display result is" loss "and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is" non-reach ". (Also referred to as "(rejection) variation pattern") ", or" variable display result of "rejection" when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" when the variable display result is "rejection" ("reach loss variation pattern") Also referred to as ")".

  A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "big hit" is referred to as a "hit variation pattern". The hit variation pattern includes a "big hit variation pattern" corresponding to the variable display result "big hit" and a "small hit variation pattern" corresponding to the variable display result "small hit". Good. As the jackpot variation pattern, a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to each jackpot type may be prepared.

  The non-reach variation pattern corresponds to the time saving control that is executed when the total number of reserved memories is large, or when the gaming state is the high-accuracy state or the time saving state, and multiple variation patterns with different variation times are prepared. It is good to put it. As a result, any one of the variation patterns is selected in accordance with the total number of pending storages and the gaming state, so that it is possible to control the variation time to be reduced according to the total number of pending storages and the gaming state.

  For the variation patterns including the reach effect such as the big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern, the variation patterns corresponding to the reach modes of the respective reach effects are prepared. A variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as a “normal reach variation pattern”, and a variation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is performed is referred to as a “super reach variation pattern”.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the variation category and the variation pattern according to the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (miss) variation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The variation category “PA2” is a non-reach (miss) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA2-1” and “PA2-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PA2”. The variation category “PA3” is a normal reach (miss) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PA3”. The variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (miss) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-3” belong to the fluctuation category “PA4”. The variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (miss) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-3” belong to the fluctuation category “PA5”. The variation category “PB1” is a shortening / reach (big hit) variation category. The variation pattern “PB1-1” belongs to the variation category “PB1”. The variation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PB3”. The variation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-3” belong to the fluctuation category “PB4”. The variation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-3” belong to the fluctuation category “PB5”.

  The variation category "PA4" and the variation category "PA5" are collectively referred to as "super reach (miss) variation category", and the variation category "PB4" and the variation category "PB5" are collectively referred to as "super reach (big hit). ) “Variation category”, and the variation category “PA4”, variation category “PA5”, variation category “PB4”, and variation category “PB5” are collectively referred to as “super reach variation category”.

  Of the super reach variation categories, the variation category “PA5” and the variation category “PB5” are variation categories with the accessory action including the action of the movable accessory 17, and the variation category “PA4” and the variation category “PB4” are , A variable category that does not include the operation of the movable accessory 17, and does not include any accessory operation. That is, the movable accessory 17 does not operate in super reach α, but the movable accessory 17 operates in super reach β.

  The variation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the variation category “PA2” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern having a special figure variation time of a normal length. The variation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed.

  The variation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3” is a normal reach (miss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. Further, the variation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (miss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (miss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is normally long. The variation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (miss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is normally long. The variation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the variation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. Further, the variation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PB1-1” belonging to the variation category “PB1” is a shortened / reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern “PB3-1”.

  The variation category “PB1” has been described as a shortening / reach (big hit) variation category, but three symbols (for example, the same symbol) stop at the same time without reaching, and thus a big hit. It may be a non-reach (big hit) variation category. The variation pattern "PB1-1" when the variation category "PB1" is a shortened / non-reach (big hit) variation category is a shortened / non-reach (big hit) variation pattern. In addition, "shortening / non-reach (big hit)" is also called "rush hit", "shortening / non-reach (big hit) fluctuation category" is also called "rush hit fluctuation category", and "shortening / non-reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern" "Is also referred to as" collision variation pattern ". Further, a shortened / reach (big hit) change pattern and a shortened / non-reach (big hit) change pattern may belong to the change category “PB1”.

  The variation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the variation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is normally long. The variation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice. The variation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the variation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

  In addition to the above, a variation pattern in which a sliding effect is executed, and a variation in which a pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed (for example, a stirrup effect similar to the pseudo continuous effect is executed but not temporarily stopped) is executed. You may prepare a pattern.

  In the present embodiment, the 2R certainty variation big hit (probability) is not provided, but when the 2R certainty variation big hit (collision probability) is provided, a variation category for the 2R certainty variation big hit (collision probability) may be provided. For example, the variation categories “PC1”, “PC2”, and “PC3” for the 2R probability variation big hit (probability) may be provided. The fluctuation patterns “PC1-1” and “PC1-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PC1”. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-1” is a non-reach (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PC1-2” is a non-reach (probability) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. In addition, you may prepare the non-reach (probability) change pattern in which a sliding production is performed.

  The variation patterns “PC2-1” to “PC2-3” belong to the variation category “PC2”. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-1” is a super reach α (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern "PC2-2" is a super reach α (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-3” is a super reach α (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. In addition, you may prepare the super reach alpha (probability) change pattern in which the pseudo continuous change (effect) is executed.

  The fluctuation patterns “PC3-1” to “PC3-3” belong to the fluctuation category “PC3”. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-1” is a super reach β (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-2” is a super reach β (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC3-3” is a super reach β (probability) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice. It should be noted that a super reach β (probability) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed may be prepared.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, in the ROM 101, data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals as various control commands from the main board 11 (for example, information specifying the content of the control command) and various data. The data that constitutes the table is stored.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 6 includes a first special symbol game (special symbol game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In the game (special figure game using the second special figure), before the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variable display result is a big hit (16R certainty variation big hit, 8R certainty variation big hit) It is a table referred to for determining whether or not to control the gaming state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

  In the display result determination table 130, the numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result according to the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “big hit (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit). It is assigned to the special map display result of "" and "miss". Specifically, in the display result determination table 130, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is determined depending on whether the state is the low accuracy state or the high accuracy state. It is assigned to the special map display results of "big hit" and "miss".

  In the display result determination table 130, when the gaming state is the high certainty state, more determination values are assigned to the special jackpot display result of “big hit” than when the gaming state is the low certainty state. Specifically, in the low accuracy state, a predetermined number (specifically 190) of determination values (values in the range of “8000” to “8189”) are assigned to the special jackpot display result of “big hit”. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy state, the judgment values “8000” to “8818”, which are larger than the predetermined number (specifically, 819 pieces), are assigned to the special jackpot display result of “big hit”. With such a setting, in the probability variation state (high precision state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is a “big hit” compared to when it is in the non-probability variation state (low probability state). The probability of being determined to control the game state increases.

  It should be noted that different display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, and in the first special figure display result decision table for the first special figure, the special figure display result of "small hit" falls within a predetermined range. A determination value is assigned, and in the second special figure display result determination table for the second special figure, the special value display result in which the determination value in the predetermined range smaller than that of the first special figure display result determination table is “small hit” May be assigned to. As a result, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of "small hit" in the game state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning hole formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines one of a plurality of jackpot types based on the jackpot type determination random number MR2 when it is determined to control the jackpot game state by setting the special figure display result to "jack". It is a table referred to for. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A (special symbol game using the first special symbol) is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type depending on whether (a special figure game using the second special diagram) is executed is for each jackpot type (16R probability change jackpot, 8R probability change). Jackpot) is assigned.

  In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 131, in the case of the first special figure game, that is, when the special figure to be changed (also referred to as a variable special figure) is the first special figure, a predetermined number (specifically, Fifty (50) judgment values (values in the range of "0" to "49") are assigned to the 16R probability variation jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of the second special figure game, that is, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the judgment values (“0” to “ The value in the range of “79”) is assigned to the 16R probability variation jackpot. With such a setting, in the second special figure game, the 16R probability variation jackpot is more likely to occur than in the first special figure, and thus the game state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B ( High-probability high-base condition, specifically up to the 70th rotation after the end of the big hit), it is possible to increase the expectation of a 16R sure-change big hit.

  In the present embodiment, the 2R certainty variation big hit (probability) is not provided, but when the 2R certainty variation big hit (probability) is provided, the case of the second special figure game is more than that of the first special figure game. However, a small number of determination values may be assigned to the 2R certainty variation big hit (probability). With such a setting, in the second special figure game, it is less likely to be a 2R certainty variation big hit (probability) than in the first special figure, so that the game ball easily enters the second start winning hole formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. In the game state, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a 2R certainty variation big hit (probability) where it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension of the game.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table that is referred to in determining any of a plurality of variation categories. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables in which the types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like are different from each other. In the variation category determination table, a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to each variation category. Instead of the plurality of fluctuation category determination tables, one large fluctuation category determination table including information of all the fluctuation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine the fluctuation pattern to be one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables that differ from each other in the types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination is assigned to each fluctuation pattern. Note that, instead of the plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables, one large fluctuation pattern determination table including the information of each fluctuation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a look-ahead determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not the variation category has a specific pattern (described later). Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of preread determination tables having different determination contents and determination rates. In the prefetch determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to each determination content. It should be noted that, instead of the plurality of prefetch determination tables, one large prefetch determination table including information of all the prefetch determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). It In particular, at least the game state, that is, the data according to the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means, when the power is restored after the occurrence of a power outage, etc., the data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power outage (for example, a special figure Process flag). Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 is a first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. It is provided with a control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

  The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is a special figure game in which the game balls have passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first starting winning has occurred, but the game has not yet started ( Hold data (first special figure hold information) of the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates a winning number into the first start winning opening (detection order of game balls) with a reservation number, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as reservation data (first special figure reservation information) until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure reservation storage section 151B is a special figure game in which the game ball has passed (entered) through the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning has occurred, but has not yet started. Hold data (second special figure hold information) of (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates the winning number into the second starting winning opening (detection order of the game ball) with the reservation number, and the CPU 103 generates a random number based on the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as reservation data (second special figure reservation information) until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  In addition, the holding data of the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition), and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B The hold data (the second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning) may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number.

  The general figure reservation storage unit 151C stores the reservation data regarding the general figure game which has not yet been started by the ordinary symbol display device 20 (general figure reservation, although the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21). Information). For example, the public figure reservation storage unit 151C is associated with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passage gate 41, and based on the passage of the game balls, the CPU 103 extracts the general figure display result from the random number circuit 104 or the like. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number MR4 for use as reservation data (universal figure reservation information) is stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, in the game control flag setting unit 152, for each of the special figure process flag, the high probability flag, the high base flag, the big hit flag, etc., the data showing the value of the flag and the on state or the off state are shown. The data is stored. The high accuracy flag is a flag indicating whether the high accuracy state or the low accuracy state is set. The high base flag is a flag indicating whether the high base state or the low base state is set. The big hit flag is a flag which shows that it is a big hit game state.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the game control counter setting unit 154, the first reserved storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first special figure reserved storage number, and the second special figure reserved storage number. The second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter for counting, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter for counting total pending storage number, etc. Remembered. In addition, the game control counter setting unit 154 also stores a stored value (variation count value) of a variation counter (described later) and the like.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 is an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the production control board 12 is provided with a production control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores a production control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the production control CPU 120. RAM 122, a display control unit 123 that executes a process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120. A circuit 124, an I / O 125, and an RTC (real time clock) circuit 126 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, so that various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the movable accessory). 17) and the like for controlling the effect operation. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads a fixed data from the ROM 121, a fixed data read operation, the effect control CPU 120 writes a variety of variable data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the variable data, and the effect control CPU 120 causes the RAM 122 to move to the RAM 122. A fluctuation data read operation for reading various temporarily stored fluctuation data, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and an effect control CPU 120 performs an I / O operation. A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the production control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The RTC circuit 126 is a time measuring means capable of measuring time such as the current year, month, day, hour, minute and second. The RTC circuit 126 has a function of automatically adjusting the timekeeping value to the Japanese standard time using a radio clock. The RTC circuit 126 operates by receiving power from a backup power supply circuit (not shown) when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. The timing information by the RTC circuit 126 is supplied to the effect control CPU 120 and the like.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  To the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image to the image display device 5 and for transmitting an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating an instruction to the sound control board 13 are transmitted. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (illumination signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14, and the like are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that an operation action of the player for the stick controller 31A is detected from the controller sensor unit 35A, and a game for the push button 31B. A wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that an operation action of a person is detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

  In the ROM 121 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, various data used for controlling the production operation are stored in addition to the program for production control. For example, the ROM 121 stores data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the production control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  For example, in the ROM 121, a holding or the like production execution presence / absence determination table referred to for determining whether or not to execute the holding or the like production, or a holding or the like production pattern when it is determined to execute the holding or the like production (for example, additional A holding or the like effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the active display from the time until the time of digestion may be stored.

  In the ROM 121, a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 to control effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 17, etc.). The data that constitutes it is stored. Each effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content of various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, various effect operations are realized by setting effect control patterns. For example, the variable display operation of the decorative pattern corresponding to each variation pattern is realized by setting the effect control pattern corresponding to each variation pattern. The holding effect, the active display effect, the fanfare effect, the effect during the round game (the opening effect, the closing effect), the ending effect, etc. are realized by setting the effect control patterns corresponding to the respective effects.

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is a control for controlling various effect operations such as effect control process timer judgment value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, movable accessory control data, and end code. It is sufficient that the content is made up of data, and the contents of various effect controls, effect control switching timings, and the like are set in time series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data that specifies the content of operation control of a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) that is compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control microcomputer. Therefore, the determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. Instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer. Data indicating switching timing of effect control may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content such as the above.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating a voice output mode from the speaker 8, such as data indicating an output mode of effect sound and the like linked to the variable display operation of the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the voice control data is data that specifies the voice output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emitting operation mode of the lamp 9. That is, the lamp control data is data that specifies the light emitting operation of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, the control content of the effect operation when the operation is effectively detected, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that specifies the effect operation according to the operation on the operation unit. The movable accessory control data includes, for example, data indicating an operation mode of the movable accessory 17. That is, the movable accessory control data is data that specifies the operation of the movable accessory 17. It should be noted that these control data need not be included in all the effect control patterns, and an effect control pattern configured to include some control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various effect operations executed according to the content of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character is displayed. Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output a sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data to perform an operation specified by the operation detection control data. During the effective period, the control for accepting the operation on the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B and determining the effect contents is performed. It should be noted that dummy data (data that does not specify control) may be set for the data corresponding to the production device that is not the control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The production operation shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the final stop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative pattern. An effect control pattern for executing the effect operation may be provided corresponding to a part of the period (for example, the period for performing the notice effect). Alternatively, in order to execute the production operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, a period during which a round is being executed in the big hit game state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the big hit game state, etc.) Effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data forming the applicable effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data forming the applicable effect control pattern may be read. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 and the read position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, each time the performance control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the performance control process timer determination values, and if it matches, the performance operation according to various corresponding control data. Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect device (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to the process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. 9, control of the movable accessory 17, etc.) is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, the display control data # 1 to display control data #n and the voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to #n. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n, movable accessory control data # 1 to movable accessory control data #n, respectively The control contents of the production operation in the device are shown, and production control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n for designating execution of production control are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern thus set is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, the accessory control board 16, and the like. For example, in the display control unit 123 that receives a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads out image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as a CGROM and temporarily stores it in the VRAM. Let Further, in the voice control board 13 that receives the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesizing IC reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like to develop the voice data. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 10A, for example, is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the effect operation. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. There is.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types in which the state can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the effect image display state on the screen of the image display device 5 or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of the plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of the effect process flag, the high accuracy flag, and the high base flag. It

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the operation of displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating a timer value in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Further, the effect control counter setting unit 193 also stores data indicating an effect number count value that is a stored value of the effect number counter for counting one or both of the number of time reductions and the number of probability changes.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, the data forming the first start-up winning prize reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "4"). . When there is a start winning at the first starting winning opening, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Specifically, four commands (first starting mouth prize notification command, symbol designating command, variation category command, first reserved memory number notification command) are one set, or two commands (first starting mouth prize notification One set of the command and the first reserved storage number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Of the commands transmitted from the main board 11, the symbol command, the variation category command, and the first reserved memory number notification command can be stored in the first start-up winning command buffer 194A for each buffer number. , A storage area for storing the symbol designating command, a storage area for storing the variable category command, and a storage area for storing the first reserved storage number notification command are secured.

  The effect control CPU 120 associates the command received from the main board 11 at the time of the first start prize with each set and stores it in the storage area of the first start prize-received command buffer 194A. For example, when the CPU 120 for effect control normally receives four commands (first start mouth prize notification command, symbol designating command, variation category command, first reserved memory number notification command) at the time of the first start winning, the empty area The storage area for the buffer number that has become (the storage area for storing the symbol designating command, the storage area for storing the variable category command, and the storage area for storing the first reserved storage number notification command have nothing stored therein. In each storage area of the buffer number), the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the first reserved storage number notification command are stored. When the storage area of the plurality of buffer numbers is a free area, the symbol designating command, the variable category command, and the first reserved storage number notification command are stored in the storage area of the smallest free buffer number. The example shown in FIG. 10B shows a state in which commands are stored in the storage areas of buffer numbers “1” to “3”. On the other hand, when the CPU 120 for effect control normally receives the two commands (first start mouth prize notification command and first reserved storage number notification command) at the time of the first start winning, it stores the buffer number which is an empty area. Area (storage area for storing symbol designating commands (storage area designated as "designation" in FIG. 10B)), storage area for storing variation category commands (designated as "variation category" in FIG. 10 (B)) Storage area) and the storage area for storing the first reserved storage number notification command (the storage area indicated as “reserved storage number notification” in FIG. 10 (B)). The first reserved storage number notification command is stored in the storage area). When the storage areas of the plurality of buffer numbers are free areas, the first reserved storage number notification command is stored in the storage area of the smallest buffer number which is free area.

  The commands stored in the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B are deleted one by one each time the variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (winning order of commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the first special drawing game, one command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number is deleted and deleted. The commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command are shifted while maintaining the winning order (the relationship of the buffer numbers). For example, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the first special drawing game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. , The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” becomes the buffer number “2”. Be shifted.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the data forming the second start prize-winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second start prize-winning reception command buffer 194B is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (eg, “4”). . When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Specifically, four commands (a second start winning notification command, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a second reserved memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 in one set. It Of the commands transmitted from the main board 11, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the second reserved storage number notification command can be stored in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B for each buffer number. A storage area for storing the symbol designating command, a storage area for storing the variable category command, and a storage area for storing the second reserved storage number notification command are secured.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the command received from the main board 11 at the time of the second start prize in association with each set in the storage area of the second start prize received command buffer 194B. For example, when the CPU 120 for effect control normally receives four commands (second start mouth prize notification command, symbol designating command, variation category command, second reserved memory number notification command) at the time of the second start winning, the empty area Storage area for buffer numbers (storage area for storing symbol designating commands (storage area designated as "designation" in FIG. 10C)), storage area for storing variable category commands (FIG. 10C) Nothing is stored in both the storage area indicated as “Variation category” in FIG. 10 and the storage area storing the second reserved storage number notification command (storage area indicated as “reserved storage number notification” in FIG. 10C). In each storage area of the buffer numbers which are not stored, the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the second reserved storage number notification command are stored. When the storage area of the plurality of buffer numbers is a free area, the symbol designating command, the variable category command, and the second reserved storage number notification command are stored in the storage area of the smallest free buffer number. The example shown in FIG. 10 (C) represents a state in which commands are stored in the storage areas of buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start prize winning command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C are deleted one by one each time the variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (winning order of commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in synchronization with the second special drawing game, one command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number is deleted and deleted. The commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command are shifted while maintaining the winning order (the relationship of the buffer numbers). For example, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the second special drawing game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10C, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. , The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data forming the first prefetching notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first prefetching notice buffer 194C is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to each data forming the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C stores the determination content regarding the read-ahead notice effect related to each holding information determined by the effect control CPU 120, etc. in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "4". To be done. When the hold data (1 set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start-up winning command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B due to the start of variable display of the decorative pattern, In the first prefetching notice buffer 194C, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is received in the other buffer in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B. When the number is shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the first prefetching notice buffer 194C are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data forming the second prefetching notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second pre-reading notice buffer 194D is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to each data forming the second start prize-winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, the second pre-reading notice buffer 194D stores the determination content regarding the pre-reading notice production related to each holding information decided by the production control CPU 120 or the like in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "4". To be done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C due to the start of variable display of the decorative design, In the second prefetching notice buffer 194D, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reserved data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is received in the other buffer in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C. When the number is shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the second prefetching notice buffer 194D are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, the RAM 102 is cleared, for example. In addition, register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, the interrupt is permitted and then the loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state when the power supply was stopped last time may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, a predetermined main side error process (including a sensor error notification process) is executed to perform an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, etc., supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 are output (steps). S13).

  Following the information output process of step S13, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process (step S14). In the game random number updating process of step S14, for example, at least a part of the game random numbers (for example, random number values MR1 to MR5) used on the main board 11 side is updated by software. As an example, the CPU 103 may update the numerical data indicating the game random number counted by the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 with software.

  Following the game random number updating process of step S14, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation of the display device 4B and the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process processing, the CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing (step S16). By executing the normal symbol process process, the display operation in the normal symbol display device 20 (for example, lighting of segment LED, extinguishing, etc.) is controlled, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol and the movable wing piece in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are controlled. Allows for tilting motion settings.

  Following the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, the effect control among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the production control command to the substrate 12, set the predetermined control data to the output port of the production control INT signal to turn on the production control INT signal for the predetermined time. It is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table, for example, by setting the switch to the off state. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after setting the interrupt enable state.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the sensor error notification process (step S12) executed in the game control timer interrupt process. In the sensor error notification process shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a magnet sensor signal indicating an abnormal value has been input from the magnet sensor (step S20). When the magnet sensor signal is not input in step S20 (step S20; NO), the sensor error notification process ends.

  When the magnet sensor signal is input in step S20 (step S20; YES), the CPU 103 determines that a magnetic abnormality has occurred, sets a magnetic abnormality flag indicating that the magnetic abnormality has been detected (step S21), The error notification LED is turned on to notify that a magnetic abnormality has occurred (step S22), and the magnetic abnormality notification designating command is set to be transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S23). Then, the sensor error notification process ends. The magnetic abnormality notification designation command set in step S23 is executed, for example, by executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 after the main-side error process is completed. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing executed in step S15 of the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process (step S15) shown in FIG.

  In the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first detects a detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first starting opening switch 22A is turned on (step S201). When it is determined in step S201 that the first starting opening switch 22A is turned on (step S201; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the first special figure hold storage number (the first special figure game hold number) is a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step S202). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reservation storage number by reading the first reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example.

  When it is determined in step S202 that the first special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value (step S202; NO), the CPU 103 stores the value stored in the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (starting). The mouth buffer value) is set to "1" (step S207). Subsequent to the processing of step S207, the CPU 103 executes the processing for starting winning (FIG. 15) (step S208), and sets (clears) the starting opening buffer value to “0” (step S209).

  When it is determined that the first starting opening switch 22A is not turned on in step S201 (step S201 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S202 that the first special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit value, (Step S202 (YES)) After executing the processing of step S209, the CPU 103 operates the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning a prize ball device 6B. Based on the detection signal, it is determined whether the second starting port switch 22B is on (step S203). When it is determined in step S203 that the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step S203; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the second special figure pending storage number (second special figure game pending number) is a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step S204). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reservation storage number by reading the second reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example.

  When it is determined in step S204 that the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value (step S204; NO), the CPU 103 stores the value stored in the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (starting). The mouth buffer value) is set to "2" (step S210). Subsequent to the process of step S210, the CPU 103 executes the process for starting winning (FIG. 15) (step S211), sets (clears) the starting mouth buffer value to “0” (step S212), and determines the starting winning determination. To finish.

  When it is determined in step S203 that the second starting opening switch 22B is not on (step S203 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S204 that the number of second special figure reservation storages has reached the upper limit value. (Step S204 (YES)) ends the start winning determination process without performing the processes of Steps S210, S211, and S212.

  According to the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 14, even when the first winning opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect the starting winning of the game ball, the processing based on the respective detections. Can be completed.

  FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the start winning process (step S208, step S211). In the processing for winning a prize shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first updates the special figure reservation storage number according to the starting opening buffer value so as to be incremented by 1 (step S215). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the first holding storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second holding storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved storage number count value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. Subsequent to the process of step S215, the total pending storage number is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S216). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to be incremented by 1.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S216, the CPU 103 selects from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determining Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (step S217). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit 151 corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S218). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the starting mouth buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the process of step S218, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a start mouth prize notification command corresponding to the start mouth buffer value to the effect control board 12 (step S219). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the first starting mouth winning notification command is performed. When the starting opening buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning notification command is performed. The starting mouth winning notification command set in step S219 is, for example, after the special symbol process process is finished, the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is executed. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  Following the process of step S219, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (step S220). After that, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command (step S221). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting the first reserved storage number notification command is performed. Further, when the starting port buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the second reserved storage number notification command is performed. Then, the start winning a prize process is ended. In addition, the reserved storage number notification command set in step S221 is, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, the command control processing (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 11 is executed. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the random number determination process at the time of winning (step S220). In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 first identifies the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S401). In the process of step S401, the CPU 103 identifies whether or not it is the big hit game state by checking the state of the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Specifically, the CPU 103 specifies that the big hit flag is in the on state, it is the big hit game state, and specifies that the big hit flag is not in the on state (when it is the off state), it is not the big hit game state. In addition, in the processing of step S401, the CPU 103 identifies whether the high base state or the low base state by checking the state of the high base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Specifically, the CPU 103 identifies the high base state when the high base flag is on, and identifies the low base state when the high base flag is not on (the off state). . Further, in the process of step S401, the CPU 103 identifies the high-accuracy state or the low-accuracy state by confirming the state of the high-accuracy flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Good. Specifically, the CPU 103 specifies that the high-accuracy flag is in the high-accuracy state when it is in the on state, and determines that it is in the low-accuracy state when the high-accuracy flag is not in the on state (when it is in the off state). May be.

  Following the processing of step S401, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is currently in the jackpot gaming state (step S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming state is specified in the process of step S401. When it is determined in step S402 that it is not in the big hit game state (step S402; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is currently in the high base state (step S403). That is, it is determined whether or not the high base state is specified in the process of step S401.

  When it is determined in step S402 that the game is in the big hit state (step S402; YES), or when it is determined in step S403 that it is in the high base state (step S403; YES), the CPU 103 sets the starting mouth buffer value. Is determined to be "2" (step S404). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the second starting prize (starting prize in which the variation special map is the second special map). When it is determined in step S404 that the starting opening buffer value is not "2" (step S404; NO), the winning random number determination process ends.

  When it is determined in step S403 that the vehicle is not in the high base state (step S403 (NO)), or when it is determined that the starting opening buffer value is “2” in step S404 (step S404 (YES)), The CPU 103 sets (selects) a special figure display result determination table according to the current game state (step S405). Specifically, when the high-accuracy state is not set, the CPU 103 determines from the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 6 that the table data for the low-precision state (the value in the range of “8000” to “8189” is “big hit”). When the table data assigned to the special figure display result is set and the high-accuracy state is set, the table data for the high-accuracy state (“8000” to “8818”) is displayed in the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. The table data assigned to the special figure display result of which the range value is “big hit” is set. Note that the CPU 103 identifies the high-accuracy state when the high-accuracy flag is on, and sets the high-accuracy flag to the high-accuracy flag. When it is not in the on state (when it is in the off state), it may be specified as the inaccurate state. In the case of using the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table), if the starting port buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table is used and the starting port When the buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table may be used.

  Subsequent to the process of step S405, the CPU 103 sets the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S217 of the process for starting winning a prize shown in FIG. 15 within the predetermined jackpot determination range. It is determined whether there is any (step S406). For example, the CPU 103 compares the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 with the individual determination values assigned to the special jackpot display result of the “big hit” in the special figure display result determination table data set in step S405. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a determination value that matches the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1. Alternatively, the CPU 103 sets the numerical value indicating the random number value MR1 and the minimum value (lower limit value) of the determination values assigned to the special jackpot display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result determination table data set in step S405. ) And the maximum value (upper limit value) may be compared to determine whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the range between the minimum value and the maximum value of the determination value.

  If it is determined in step S406 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range (step S406; YES), the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 extracted in step S217 of the starting winning process shown in FIG. 15 is indicated. The jackpot type is determined based on the numerical data (step S407). Specifically, first, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special map (“first special map” corresponding to “1” or “second special map” corresponding to “2”) specified by the starting opening buffer value. Set (select) the jackpot type determination table. Specifically, the CPU 103 sets table data according to the fluctuation special figure from the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 7. Subsequently, the CPU 103 compares, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type with the determination value of each big hit type in the big hit type determining table data set according to the variation special figure. Then, the jackpot type that matches the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 may be determined.

  Subsequent to the process of step S407, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a symbol designating command according to the determination result of the process of step S407 to the effect control board 12 (step S408). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S406 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step S406; NO), a setting for transmitting the symbol designating command corresponding to the loss to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S406). S409). In addition, the symbol designating command set in step S409 is, for example, after the special symbol process process is finished, the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

After executing the processing of step S408 or the processing of step S409, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is in the high base state (step S410). The processing of step S410 is executed in the following four scenes (Scene 1 to Scene 4).
(Scene 1)
A scene that is not in the big hit game state and is in a low base state (when step S402 (NO), step S403 (NO)). It should be noted that there may be a first starting prize (starting prize in which the fluctuation special map is the first special map) or a second starting prize (starting prize in which the fluctuation special map is the second special map). (Scene 2)
The scene where the second start winning is made in the high base state, not in the big hit game state (when step S402 (NO), step S403 (YES), step S404 (YES)).
(Scene 3)
When there is a second start prize in the big hit game state and in the low base state (when step S402 (YES) and step S404 (YES)).
(Scene 4)
When there is a second start prize in the big hit game state and the high base state (step S402 (YES), step S404 (YES)).

  When it is determined in step S410 that it is not in the high base state (step S410; NO), that is, in the case of scene 1 or scene 3, the CPU 103 uses the low base state according to the special figure display result. The prefetch determination table is set (selected) (step S411). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S410 that the vehicle is in the high base state (step S410; YES), that is, in scene 2 or scene 4, the CPU 103 determines that the high base state is in accordance with the special figure display result. A read-ahead judgment table for use is set (selected) (step S412).

  FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the prefetch determination table and the like. FIG. 17A is a configuration example of a pre-reading determination table to be referred to when the special figure display result is “miss” in the low base state. FIG. 17B is a configuration example of the pre-reading determination table to be referred to when the special figure display result is “miss” in the high base state. FIG. 17C is a configuration example of the pre-reading determination table to be referred to when the special figure display result is “big hit” in the low base state or the high base state. FIG. 17D is a setting example of the variation category command. The "specific pattern" is a variation pattern that is a super reach variation pattern regardless of the number of pending storages. The “non-specific pattern” is a variation pattern other than the “specific pattern”.

  The pre-reading determination table of FIG. 17 (A) is set based on the setting of the variation category determination table that is referred to when the special figure display result is “miss” in the low base state shown in FIG. 20 (A). There is. According to the variation category determination table of FIG. 20A, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is any of “97” to “99”, regardless of the number of pending storage, the super reach variation category (variation Categories “PA4”, “PA5”) are determined. That is, if the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is any of "97" to "99", the super reach variation pattern (variation patterns "PA4-1" to "PA4-3") regardless of the number of reserved memories. , Fluctuation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-3”) (see FIG. 21). Therefore, when the special figure display result is "miss" in the low base state, at least when the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is any of "97" to "99", at the time of winning the start or starting the variable display. A specific variation pattern (specific pattern) called a super reach variation pattern is determined regardless of the number of pending storages at the time (at the time of the variation). Therefore, in the pre-reading determination table of FIG. 17A, a value in the range of "97" to "99" is assigned to "specific pattern", and "0" to "non-specific pattern" other than "specific pattern". Values in the range of "96" are assigned.

  The pre-reading determination table of FIG. 17 (B) is set based on the setting of the variation category determination table that is referred to when the special figure display result is “miss” in the high base state shown in FIG. 20 (B). There is. According to the variation category determination table of FIG. 20B, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is any of “89” to “99”, the super reach variation category (variation Categories “PA4”, “PA5”) are determined. That is, if the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is any of "89" to "99", the super reach variation pattern (variation patterns "PA4-1" to "PA4-3") regardless of the number of reserved memories. , Fluctuation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-3”) (see FIG. 21). Therefore, when the special figure display result is "missed" in the high base state, at least when the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is any of "89" to "99", the start winning or the variable display start The specific pattern is determined regardless of the number of pending storages at the time (at the time of the change). Therefore, in the pre-reading determination table of FIG. 17B, a value in the range of “89” to “99” is assigned to “specific pattern”, and “0” to “non-specific pattern” other than “specific pattern”. A value in the range of "88" is assigned.

  The pre-reading determination table of FIG. 17C is a variation category determination table to be referred to when the special figure display result is “big hit” in the low base state shown in FIG. 20C, and FIG. It is set based on the fluctuation category determination table that is referred to when the special map display result is "big hit" in the high base state shown. According to the variation category determination table of FIG. 20 (C) and the variation category determination table of FIG. 20 (D), if the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is any of “60” to “99”, The super reach variation category (variation categories “PB4” and “PB5”) is determined regardless of the number of pending storages. That is, if the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is any of "60" to "99", the super reach variation pattern (variation patterns "PB4-1" to "PB4-3") regardless of the number of reserved memories. , Fluctuation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-3”) (see FIG. 21). Therefore, when the special figure display result is "big hit" in the low base state or the high base state, at least when the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is any of "60" to "99", at the time of winning the start prize. Alternatively, the specific pattern is determined regardless of the number of pending storages at the start of variable display (at the time of the change). Therefore, in the prefetch determination table of FIG. 17C, a value in the range of “60” to “99” is assigned to “specific pattern”, and “0” to “non-specific pattern” other than “specific pattern”. A value in the range of “59” is assigned.

  Therefore, in the processing of step S411 that is executed when it is determined that the high base state is not set in step S410, the CPU 103 executes the process illustrated in FIG. When the table data forming the prefetch determination table shown in (A) is set and it is determined in step S406 that the special figure display result is "big hit", the prefetch shown in FIG. 17C is performed. Set the table data that constitutes the judgment table.

  Further, in the process of step S412 executed when it is determined that the high base state is determined in step S410, when the CPU 103 determines in step S406 that the special figure display result is “miss”, FIG. When the table data forming the prefetch determination table shown in (B) is set and it is determined in step S406 that the special figure display result is "big hit", the prefetch shown in FIG. 17C is performed. Set the table data that constitutes the judgment table.

  After executing the process of step S411 or the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines whether the variation pattern is the “non-specific pattern” or the “specific pattern” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category. Whether or not there is a prefetch is determined (step S413). Specifically, the CPU 103 sets the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, which is extracted in step S217 of the process for starting winning prize shown in FIG. 15, and the prefetch set in step S411 or step S412. By comparing with the determination value of the “non-specific pattern” or the “specific pattern” in the determination table data, which of the determination value of the “non-specific pattern” and the determination value of the “specific pattern” is the random number value MR3. It may be determined whether or not it matches the numerical data shown.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S413, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the variable category command according to the determination result (prefetch determination) in step S413 (step S414), and then ends the winning random number determination processing. Note that in the processing of step S414, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 17D, according to the determination result of the processing of step S413. Specifically, in the process of step S413, when it is determined that the pattern is a non-specific pattern (miss), the transmission setting for transmitting the variation category command in which the EXT data is set to “00” to the effect control board 12 When it is determined that it is a specific pattern (miss), the transmission setting for transmitting the variation category command in which the EXT data is set to “01” to the production control board 12 is performed, and the non-specific pattern (big hit) is set. When it is determined that there is a setting, the transmission setting for transmitting the variation category command in which the EXT data is set to “02” is performed to the effect control board 12, and when it is determined that the specific pattern (big hit) is set, the EXT data is set to “03”. The transmission setting for transmitting the variation category command in which "" is set to the production control board 12 is performed.

  Following the start winning determination process (step S101), the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. .

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is a process executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". The special symbol normal process includes a process of deciding (predetermining) before the variable display result is displayed and derived, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is set as "big hit". In the special symbol normal process, when the variable display result is predetermined, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1".

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". The variation pattern setting process is a process of determining a variation pattern based on the variable display result or the like predetermined in the special symbol normal process (step S110), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, and a first variation start command. (Or a second variation start command) and the like are included. In the variation pattern setting process, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is a process executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". The special symbol variation process is a process for varying (variably displaying) the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the variation start is the special symbol variation time (FIG. 5). It includes a process of determining whether or not it has been reached. In the special symbol variation process, when the elapsed time after the variation starts reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stop process of step S113 is a process executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". The special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, the process to stop the display of the fixed special symbol (derive), the big hit flag is turned off If it is (the special symbol normal process (step S110), the variable display result is set to "miss" in advance) as a process to be executed, the gaming state transition at the time of changing the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. Setting process for sending a hit start designation command (fanfare command) as a process or a process to be executed when the big hit flag is on (when it is predetermined that the variable display result is "big hit") Etc. are included. In the special symbol stop processing, when the big hit flag is off, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and when the big hit flag is on, the special drawing process flag The value of is updated to "4".

  The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is processing executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". The big hit opening pre-processing is a process for performing setting for opening the special winning opening (for example, setting a solenoid drive signal for the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door for opening the special winning opening) and the like. , And includes setting processing for transmitting a special winning opening opening notification command and the like. In the big hit opening pre-processing, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit opening process in step S115 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". The big hit open process is performed based on whether the elapsed time after opening the special winning opening has passed a predetermined time, whether the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 has reached a predetermined number, or the like. Processing for determining the timing of returning the winning opening from the open state to the closed state, and setting for closing the special winning opening (for example, for the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door for closing the special winning opening) It includes processing for setting a solenoid drive signal) and setting processing for transmitting a notification command after opening the special winning opening. In the big hit opening process, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6".

  The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". After the jackpot opening process, the process of determining whether the number of executions of the round in which the special winning opening is opened has reached the maximum winning opening maximum number, or when the maximum winning opening maximum number has not been reached The processing to be executed includes the setting processing to send the special winning opening opening notification command, and the setting processing to send the hit end designation command as the processing to be executed when the maximum number of opening special winning openings is reached. I'm out. In the jackpot opening post-processing, the value of the special map process flag is updated to "5" when the number of rounds executed has not reached the maximum winning opening maximum number, and when the maximum winning opening maximum has been reached, The value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7".

  The big hit ending process of step S117 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". The big hit end process is a process of determining whether or not a big hit end production waiting time (waiting time corresponding to the ending effect execution period) has been passed, or a process to be executed when the big hit ending production waiting time has passed. It includes a process of setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a high-accuracy high-base state, a process of setting the number of STs and a number of shortening times, and the like. In the big hit ending process, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value when the waiting time corresponding to the ending effect execution period has elapsed.

  Further, the big hit opening process (step S115), the big hit opening process (step S116), the big hit opening pre-process (step S114) and the big hit ending process (step S117) are big wins when the count switch 23 is turned on. It includes transmission settings for transmitting the oral winning notification command.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process (step S110). In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is “0” (step S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is held. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

  When it is determined in step S231 that the number of second special figure reservation storages is not "0" (step S231; NO), the CPU 103 starts the special figure from the reservation number "1" of the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B. The reserved data (numerical data) of the random number value MR1 for determining the display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are read out and temporarily stored (step S232). That is, when there is a hold (hold data) for the second special figure game, the CPU 103 regards the second special figure hold storage unit as the hold data for the variation regardless of whether the first special figure game is held. Numerical data (holding data of the second special figure game extracted in step S217 at the earliest (oldest)) corresponding to the holding number "1" of 151B is read out and temporarily stored in a variation random number buffer or the like. .

  Following the processing of step S232, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second special figure reservation storage number stored in the game control counter setting section 154 (see FIG. 8), and the second special figure reservation storage section 151B (FIG. 8) is stored (step S233). Specifically, in the process of step S233, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second reserved storage number count value, and the second special figure reserved storage unit 151B stores entries lower than the reserved number "1" (for example, the reserved number. The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries (corresponding to “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry. In addition, in the process of step S233, the CPU 103 may subtract 1 from the total pending storage number count value. Following the processing of step S233, the CPU 103 updates the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variation special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step S234).

  When it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reservation storage number is "0" (step S231; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure reservation storage number is "0". The determination is made (step S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is on hold. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved storage number count value stored by the first reserved storage number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Good.

  When it is determined in step S235 that the number of the 1st special figure reservation storages is not "0" (step S235; NO), CPU103 is a special figure from the reservation number "1" of the 1st special figure reservation storage part 151A. The reserved data (numerical data) of the random number value MR1 for determining the display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are read out and temporarily stored (step S236). That is, when there is no hold (hold data) for the second special figure game (step S231 (YES)), and when there is a hold for the first special figure game, the CPU 103 determines that the hold data for the change is Numerical data corresponding to the reservation number "1" in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A (the first special figure game hold data extracted in step S217 at the earliest (oldest)) is read and the random number buffer for fluctuations is read. It is stored temporarily in.

  Following the processing of step S236, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first special figure reservation storage number stored in the game control counter setting section 154 (see FIG. 8), and at the same time, the first special figure reservation storage section 151A (FIG. 8) is stored (step S237). Specifically, in the process of step S237, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first reserved storage number count value, and the first special figure reserved storage unit 151A stores an entry lower than the reserved number “1” (for example, the reserved number. The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries (corresponding to “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry. In addition, in the process of step S237, the CPU 103 may subtract 1 from the total pending storage number count value. Following the processing of step S237, the CPU 103 updates the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variation special figure designation buffer, to “1” (step S238).

  As described above, since the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reservation storage number is "0", the first special figure game and the second special figure are executed. When the game and the game are suspended, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game. It should be noted that the second special figure game is not limited to a mode in which the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes) through the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). In addition, the special figure game (first special figure game, second special figure game) may be executed in the order in which the start winnings (first starting prize, second starting prize) are generated. In this case, it suffices to provide a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winning is generated, and to determine which of the first special figure game and the second special figure game is to be executed from the stored data.

  After executing the processing of step S234 or the processing of step S238, the CPU 103 sets (selects) a special figure display result determination table according to the current game state (step S239). For example, the CPU 103 may set the special figure display result determination table similarly to step S405 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. When different display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table and second special figure display result determination table) are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, in the processing of step S405, the starting mouth buffer is used. Although the value (“1” or “2”) is referred to, the variable special figure designation buffer value (“1” or “2”) may be referred to in the process of step S239.

  Subsequently, the CPU 103 displays the special figure based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation and the special figure display result determination table set in step S239. The result is determined (step S240). In the process of step S240, the CPU 103, similarly to step S406 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. 16, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 and the special figure display result set in step S239. Determine the special map display result (whether to make a "big hit" or "miss") by comparing each judgment value assigned to the special jackpot display result in the determination table data, point by point. do it.

  Following the processing of step S240, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S240 is a “big hit” (step S241). When it is determined that it is a "big hit" in step S241 (step S241; YES), the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the on state (step S242). The big hit flag is cleared (reset) to the off state in the big hit ending process of step S117. Subsequent to the process of step S242, the CPU 103 executes a big hit type determination process (S244). The jackpot type determination process of step S244 is the same as the jackpot type determination process executed in step S407 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. Subsequent to the jackpot type determination processing of step S244, the CPU 103 has a stored value of a jackpot type buffer provided in, for example, the game control buffer setting unit 155, corresponding to the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination processing of step S244. The big hit type buffer value is set (step S245). That is, what is the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination processing in step S244 is stored. As an example, the CPU 103 sets the big hit type buffer value to "1" if the big hit type determined in the big hit type determination processing of step S244 is "16R probability variable big hit", and if it is "8R probability variable big hit", it is the big hit type. Set the buffer value to "2".

  When it is determined that it is not the "big hit" in step S241 (step S241 (NO)) or after the processing of step S245, the CPU 103 determines in advance whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, and Sets the confirmed special symbol corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state (step S248). Following the processing of step S248, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting processing (step S249), and ends the special symbol normal processing.

  If it is determined in step S235 that the number of pending memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" (step S235; YES), the demo display setting (step S250) is executed, and the special symbol is executed. Normal processing ends. In the demo display setting of step S250, a customer waiting demo designation command for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. On the other hand, it is determined whether or not it has been transmitted. At this time, if it has been transmitted, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the demo display setting ends.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process (step S111). In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 19, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S250). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variable display result in the special symbol normal process (step S110) is set as "big hit" in advance. When it is determined that the jackpot flag is in the on state (step S250; YES), the effect control command (display result designation command) corresponding to the jackpot type (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot) determined in step S244. Transmission settings are made (step S251). When it is determined that the big hit flag is not in the on state (step S250; NO), transmission setting of the effect control command (display result designation command) indicating that the game is lost is set (step S252).

  After executing the processing of step S251 or the processing of step S252, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is in the high base state (step S253). When it is determined in step S253 that it is not in the high base state (step S253; NO), the CPU 103 sets (selects) variation category determination table data for the low base state according to the special figure display result ( Step S254). Specifically, when it is determined in step S250 that the big hit flag is not on, the CPU 103 determines the variation category determination table for low base / miss time (variation category determination shown in FIG. 20A). (Table) which configures the table data, and when it is determined in step S250 that the jackpot flag is in the on state, the variation category determination table for low base / jackpot (shown in FIG. 20C) Set the table data that constitutes the variable category determination table).

  When it is determined in step S253 that it is in the high base state (step S253; YES), the CPU 103 sets (selects) the variation category determination table data for the high base state according to the special figure display result ( Step S255). Specifically, when it is determined in step S250 that the big hit flag is not on, the CPU 103 determines a variation category determination table for high base / miss time (variation category determination shown in FIG. 20B). (Table) constituting the table, and when it is determined in step S250 that the big hit flag is in the ON state, the variation category determination table for high base / big hit (shown in FIG. 20D) Set the table data that constitutes the variable category determination table).

  After executing the process of step S254 or the process of step S255, the CPU 103 determines the variation category based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category (step S256). Specifically, the CPU 103 stores the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation category determination stored in the random number buffer for fluctuations and the number of pending storages of the fluctuation category determination table data set in step S254 or step S255. The variation category that matches the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 may be determined by, for example, comparing with the determination value of.

  As an example, when the table data configuring the variation category determination table of FIG. 20 (A) is set in step S254 and the number of reserved memories is “0” or “1” (reserved memory related to the prize) In the case where there is no other pending storage or there is one pending storage), the CPU 103 determines that when the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is in the range of "0" to "69", the variation category " PA2 "is determined, the variation category" PA3 "is determined when it is in the range of" 70 "to" 89 ", the variation category" PA4 "is determined when it is in the range of" 90 "to" 98 ", and" 99 "is determined. , The variation category “PA5” is determined.

  When the table data forming the variation category determination table of FIG. 20 (A) is set in step S254 and the number of reserved memories is in the range of “2” or “3” (other than the reserved memory related to the winning prize) In the case where there are two or three pending storages in), the CPU 103 determines that when the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is in the range of “0” to “3”, the variation category “PA1”. , The variation category “PA2” is determined when it is in the range of “4” to “79”, the variation category “PA3” is determined when it is in the range of “80” to “96”, and “97” is determined. When it is in the range of "98", the variation category "PA4" is determined, and when it is "99", the variation category "PA5" is determined.

  In the case where the table data forming the variation category determination table of FIG. 20 (A) is set in step S254 and the number of reserved memories is in the range of “4” (the reserved memories other than the reserved memory related to the prize are stored. If there are four), the CPU 103 determines the variation category “PA1” when the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is in the range of “0” to “63”, and “64”. When it is in the range of to "79", the variation category "PA2" is determined, when it is in the range of "80" to "96", the variation category "PA3" is determined, and it is in the range of "97" to "98". When it is "99", the variation category "PA4" is determined, and when it is "99", the variation category "PA5" is determined.

  Further, when the table data forming the fluctuation category determination table of FIG. 20C is set in step S254, the CPU 103 is a numerical value indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation category determination, regardless of the number of reserved memories. When the data is in the range of "0" to "9", the variation category "PB1" is determined, when it is in the range of "10" to "59", the variation category "PB3" is determined, and "60" to "60". When it is in the range of 89 ", the variation category" PB4 "is determined, and when it is in the range of" 90 "to" 99 ", the variation category" PB5 "is determined.

  The same applies when the table data forming the variation category determination table of FIG. 20 (B) or the variation category determination table of FIG. 20 (D) is set in step S255.

  Following the processing of step S256, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern based on the variation category determined in step S256 and the variation pattern determination random value MR5 (step S257). In the process of step S257, the CPU 103 sets (selects) the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category determined in step S256, and the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random number MR5 indicates which variation pattern. The variation pattern may be determined based on whether or not it is within the range.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the fluctuation pattern determination table. In the process of step S257, for example, when the variation category “PA2” is determined in step S256, the CPU 103 sets the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category “PA2” shown in FIG. When the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is in the range of "0" to "39", the variation pattern "PA2-1" is determined and the range of "40" to "99" is determined. If it is, the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is determined. Further, for example, when the variation category “PA3” is determined in step S256, the CPU 103 sets (selects) the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category “PA3” shown in FIG. When the numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern is in the range of "0" to "79", the fluctuation pattern "PA3-1" is determined, and when it is in the range of "80" to "99", the fluctuation pattern is determined. The pattern "PA3-2" is determined. The same applies to the case where another variation category is determined in step S256.

  The random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted at the time of executing the process, or like the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, the step S217 of the start winning process (step S208, step S211). In step S232 (or step S236) of the special symbol normal process (step S110), the data may be extracted and stored as reserved data.

  Subsequent to the process of step S257, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the effect control command (fluctuation pattern designation command) according to the determined variation pattern (step S258). In addition to the variation pattern designation command, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the first variation start command (or the second variation start command that designates the start of the second special figure game) that designates the start of the first special figure game. You may go. Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets a special figure fluctuation time timer value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 (step S259), and the value of the special figure process flag. Is updated to "2" corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S260), and the variation pattern setting process ends. By the value of the special figure process flag being updated to "2" in step S260, the special symbol variation process is executed when the next timer interrupt occurs.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing (step S113). In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 22, the CPU 103 first stops the fluctuation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and stops the display of the confirmed special symbol (derives). After that, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S291). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variable display result in the special symbol normal process (step S110) is set as "big hit" in advance. When it is determined that the big hit flag is in the on state (step S291; YES), the CPU 103 sets the big hit start effect waiting time (step S292). For example, in the process of step S292, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the big hit start effect waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S292, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting the hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for sending the hit start designation command is the buffer designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. It may be stored in the area. Following the processing of step S293, the CPU 103 sets the low accurate low base state (step S294). In the process of step S294, for example, the CPU 103 may clear the high-accuracy flag and the high-base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and set them to the off state. It should be noted that the process of step S294 may be omitted when the low accurate low base state has already been reached. Following the processing of step S294, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (step S295), and ends the special symbol stop processing.

  When it is determined in step S291 that the big hit flag is not in the on state (step S291; NO), the CPU 103 performs the gaming state transition process at the time of fluctuation (step S296). The CPU 103 executes, for example, the following process as the changing game state transition process. First, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the low-probability low base state, and if it is not the low-probability low base state, adds 1 to the value of the fluctuation number counter. The fluctuation number counter is the number of executions of the special figure game after being controlled to the low accurate low base state, and is the number of times compared with the ST number (probability variation number) and the time saving number. The ST number (probability variation number) is the number of times of execution of the variable display game that executes the probability variation control. The number of times saved is the number of times of execution of a variable display game that executes time saving control. The number of STs (the number of probable changes) and the number of shortening times are set in the big hit ending process (step S117). The CPU 103, which has incremented the value of the variation counter by 1, compares the value of the variation counter after adding 1 with the number of STs. If the value of the variation counter is greater than the number of STs, the gaming state is set to a low probability. It is sufficient to set the base state and clear the set values of the ST number and the time saving number to "0". In the present embodiment, the number of times saved and the number of times ST are the same (both 70 times), so the value of the variation counter after adding 1 may be compared with the number of times saved. Further, when the number of times saved and the number of times ST are different, each may be compared individually. That is, the CPU 103 compares the value of the fluctuation number counter after adding 1 with the shortened number of times, sets the low base state when the value of the fluctuation number counter is larger than the number of shortening times, and sets the fluctuation number counter after adding 1. May be compared with the ST number of times, and when the value of the fluctuation number counter is larger than the ST number of times, the low accuracy state may be set.

  Following the variation game state transition process of step S296, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S297), and ends the special symbol stop process. To do.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit ending process (step S117). In the big hit ending process shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit end time effect waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the jackpot opening post-processing (step S116) shown in FIG. 13, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, a timer initial set in advance corresponding to the production waiting time at the end of the jackpot is set. The value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, the CPU 103 updates the game control process timer value by, for example, subtracting 1, and whether the updated game control process timer value matches the predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. It may be determined whether or not the production waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed, depending on whether or not.

  When it is determined in step S311 that the big waiting time finish production waiting time has not elapsed (step S311; NO), the CPU 103 directly ends the big hit ending process. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S311 that the big waiting time finish production waiting time has elapsed (step S311; YES), the CPU 103 reads the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step). S312). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the high-accuracy flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the on-state or the like to set the high-accuracy state (probability change state) (step S314). Then, the CPU 103 sets the high base provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the high base state by turning it on (step S315). That is, by the processing of step S314 and step S315, at the end of the big hit game state, the game state is set to the highly accurate high base state.

  Following the processing of step S315, the CPU 103 sets the set value of the ST number (probability variation number) to 70 times (step S316), and sets the time saving number to 70 times (step S317). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the value of the variation counter that is compared with the number of STs and the number of hours saved, to "0" (step S318), and clears (resets) the jackpot flag to the off state (step S319). The value of the process flag is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S320), and the big hit ending process is ended.

  In the present embodiment, the set value of the ST number (probability variation number) and the shortening number of 70 times are set to the same value (both 70 times). The number of times may be different from the set value of 70 times. Further, in the present embodiment, the set value of the ST number (probability variation number) in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit and the set value of the ST number (probability variation number) in the case of the 16R probability variation big hit are set to the same value (both 70 times). However, the set value of the ST number (probability variation number) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the set value of the ST number (probability variation number) in the case of 16R probability variation big hit may be different values. Further, in the present embodiment, the set value of the time saving number in the case of 8R certainty variation big hit and the setting value of the time saving number in the case of 16R certainty variation big hit are set to the same value (both 70 times), but in the case of 8R certainty variation big hit The setting value of the number of hour-savings may be different from the setting value of the number of hour-savings in the case of 16R probability variation big hit. It should be noted that the CPU 103 determines that the 16R probability variable jackpot is the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155, and determines that the big hit type buffer value is "2". May be judged to be the 8R probability variation big hit. Further, when the set values of the ST number (probability variation number) and the time saving number are not different between the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the case of 16R probability variation big hit (when they are the same value), the process of step S312 (big hit type) The reading of the buffer value) may be omitted.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main processing. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in FIG.

  In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 24, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and mount on the effect control board 12. The CTC (counter / timer circuit) registers are set. Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. When it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is not in the on state (step S72; NO), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 occurs in addition to the timer interrupt. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, a control, such as an effect control command, is performed from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I / O 125, which receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  When it is determined in step S72 that the timer interrupt flag is in the on state (step S72; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the timer interrupt flag to turn it off (step S73). Command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis processing executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and controls corresponding to the produced control commands are performed.

  Following the command analysis process of step S74, the effect control CPU 120 executes an error notification process (step S75). In the error notification process of step S75, for example, an error notification corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification designating command transmitted from the main board 11 is performed regarding the act of illegally guiding the game ball to the winning opening using a magnet.

  Following the error notification process in step S75, the effect control CPU 120 executes effect control process processing (step S76). In the effect control process process of step S76, various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 17, etc.) are used based on the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11. The determination, determination, setting, etc. regarding the existing rendering operation are performed.

  Following the effect control process processing of step S76, the effect control CPU 120 executes effect random number updating processing (step S77). In the production random number updating process of step S77, for example, at least a part of the production random numbers used on the side of the production control board 12 is updated by software. As an example, the effect control CPU 120 may update the numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 by software. Then, the process returns to step S72.

  It should be noted that the interrupt for receiving the effect control command and the like from the main board 11 on the side of the effect control board 12 has been described as an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. However, the method of generating an interrupt for receiving a performance control command or the like is not limited to the above. For example, an interrupt request for receiving an effect control command or the like may be generated by an interrupt request by the leading bit of serial communication.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process (step S74). In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the stored content of the effect control command reception buffer, and thereby receives the command received from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. It is determined whether there is any (step S501). When it is determined that there is no received command (step S501; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the command analysis process.

  When it is determined that there is a received command in step S501 (step S501; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is the first start mouth winning notification command (step S502). . The effect control CPU 120 may confirm the MODE data of the received command and specify the type of the received command (see FIG. 3).

  When it is determined in step S502 that the command is the first start mouth winning notification command (step S502; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the first pending storage number notification waiting time (step S503). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may set a predetermined timer initial value as the reception waiting time of the first reserved storage number notification command in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192.

  When it is determined in step S502 that the received command is not the first start mouth prize notification command (step S502; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received command is the second start mouth prize notification command. Yes (step S504). When it determines with it being the 2nd starting mouth winning notification command in step S504 (step S504; YES), the CPU 120 for effect control sets the second waiting storage number notification waiting time (step S505). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may set the command reception control timer to a predetermined timer initial value as the reception waiting time of the second reserved storage number notification command.

  When it determines with it not being the 2nd starting mouth winning notification command in step S504 (step S504; NO), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the received command is a symbol designating command (step S506). ). When it is determined in step S506 that the received command is not the symbol designation command (step S506; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step S507). When it is determined in step S507 that the received command is not a variable category command (step S507; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is the first reserved storage number notification command (step S508). ). If it is determined in step S508 that the command is the first reserved memory number notification command (step S508; YES), the first reserved memory number notification waiting time is set, for example, by initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer. Is cleared (step S509).

  When determining in step S508 that the received command is not the first reserved memory number notification command (step S508; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is the second reserved memory number notification command. (Step S510). When it is determined in step S510 that the command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step S510; YES), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set, for example, by initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer. Is cleared (step S511).

  When it is determined to be a symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506 (YES)), when it is determined to be a variable category command in step S507 (step S507 (YES)), step S503, step S505, After performing any one of the processes of step S509 and step S511, the effect control CPU 120 sends the received command to the free space in the first start-winning command command reception command buffer 194A or the second start-winning command command reception buffer 194B. It is stored in the empty area in step S512 (step S512). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120, when the received command is the first start mouth prize notification command, or the start mouth prize notification command immediately before the received command is the first start mouth prize notification command. In the case (when the second starting opening winning award notification command is not received after receiving the first starting opening winning award notification command), the received command is stored in an empty area in the first starting winning award receiving command buffer 194A, When the received command is the second start mouth prize notification command, or when the start mouth prize notification command immediately before the received command is the second start mouth prize notification command (the second start mouth prize notification command is received If the first start opening winning award notification command is not received after that), the received command is sent to the second start winning award receiving command buffer 194. Stored in the free space in. Following the process of step S512, the process returns to the process of step S501.

  When it is determined in step S510 that the received command is not the second reserved storage number notification command (step S510; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a variation pattern designation command. Yes (step S513). When it is determined that it is the variation pattern designation command (step S513; YES), the effect control CPU 201 stores the variation pattern designation command in the variation pattern designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S515). . Following the process of step S515, the process returns to the process of step S501.

  When it is determined in step S513 that the received command is not the variation pattern designation command (step S513; NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting or the like according to each of the other received commands (step S518). For example, when the received command is a game state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may analyze the game state designation command and specify the current game state. Following the process of step S518, the process returns to the process of step S501.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the error notification process (step S75). In the error notification process shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is in the error notification notification period (step S141). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a notification control pattern (which may have the same configuration as the effect control pattern shown in FIG. 9) corresponding to the error notification is already set as a usage pattern. If it has already been set, it may be determined whether or not the notification period of the error notification is based on the set contents (notification timing etc.) and the value of the effect control process timer.

  If it is not the error notification period in step S141 (step S141; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the magnetic abnormality notification designation command has been received (step S142). When the magnetic abnormality notification designation command has not been received (step S142; NO), the error notification processing ends.

  When the magnetic abnormality notification designating command is received in step S142 (step S142; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes (starts) error notification operation control in the uppermost layer (Z value = 0). (Step S143), the error notification process ends. Also, in the case of the error notification period in step S141 (step S141; YES), operation control of error notification is executed (continued) in the uppermost layer (Z value = 0) (step S143), The error notification process ends. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the notification control pattern corresponding to the magnetic abnormality error notification as the usage pattern, and also issues the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set notification control pattern. An error notification image (FIG. 27 (A), FIG. 27 (B), FIG. 28 (A)) corresponding to the error notification of the magnetic abnormality is displayed by transmitting to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of Z values and the like of various images. FIG. 27A is a diagram exemplifying an image (image name) and an image size (image display region) corresponding to respective effects and notifications executed in the display region of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 27A, when the error notification is executed, the error notification image of the image size “large” is displayed in the display area. In other words, the error notification is executed using the error notification image having the image size “large”. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 27A, the effect execution notification is executed using the effect execution notification image of the image size “small”, and the effect effect is displayed using the effect effect effect image of the image size “large”. The effect is executed, the hold display (hold display, active display) is executed using the hold display image of the image size “small”, and the group notice effect is executed using the group notice effect image of the image size “large” Then, the chance zone effect is executed using the chance zone effect image of the image size “small”, and the step-up notice effect is executed using the step-up notice effect image of the image size “large”.

  The effect execution notification shown in FIG. 27A is a notification that the notification target effect has been executed. In the present embodiment, each of step 5 (SU5) of the step-up notice effect, group notice effect, and accessory effect corresponds to the notification target effect. That is, in the present embodiment, as the effect execution notification, when the SU5 is executed, the fact that the SU5 is executed is notified, and when the group notice effect is executed, the group notice effect is executed. However, when the character effect is executed, the fact that the character effect is executed is notified.

  FIG. 27B is a diagram exemplifying the Z value set for each image shown in FIG. The RAM 122 stores a Z value setting table in which the Z value of each image shown in FIG. 27A is set. The Z value of each image is set in the Z value setting table, as shown in FIG. The Z value indicates a layer that displays an image. The smaller the Z value, the more the image is displayed in the layer on the front side (front side, upper side) in the depth direction, and the larger the Z value, the rear side (back side, lower side) in the depth direction. The image is displayed on the layer. Therefore, for example, in FIG. 27B, when the error notification image with the Z value “0” and the chance zone effect image with the Z value “7” are displayed in an overlapping manner, the chance of the Z value “7” is displayed. An error notification image with a Z value of "0" is displayed in front of the zone effect image. Further, for example, when the group notice effect image having the Z value “6”, the chance zone effect image having the Z value “7”, and the step-up notice effect image having the Z value “8” are displayed in a superimposed manner, the Z value A chance zone effect image of Z value "7" is displayed in front of the step-up notice effect image of "8", and a group notice effect image of Z value "6" is displayed in front of the chance zone effect image of Z value "7". Is displayed. The above-mentioned images and Z values are examples. For example, the Z value of the decorative pattern (variable display effect of the decorative pattern) is "9", and the Z value of the background (background image) is "10".

  Note that the Z value of the effect execution notification image shown in FIG. 27B starts notification when the number of notifications is 3 (when execution of three effects of SU5, group notice effect, and accessory effect is informed). When the order is the third, "1", when the number of notifications is 2 or more (when the execution of two or more effects of SU5, group notice effect, and accessory effect is informed), the notification start order is 2. When it is the second, the notification start order is the first in the case of "2" and the number of notifications is 1 or more (when the execution of one or more of the SU5, group notice effect, and character effect is informed). Sometimes it is "3".

  28 and 29 are diagrams showing examples of various images. FIG. 28A shows an error notification image (an example). The error notification image shown in FIG. 28 (A) includes a pictogram image G1 for notifying that an error has occurred, and a character image G2 for notifying the message "Error has occurred! Please call a staff member." The display time of the error notification image (error notification time) may be, for example, 30 seconds. The display time of the error notification image may be different depending on the type of error.

  The image size of the error notification image shown in FIG. 27A is a display area in which the display area of the pictogram image G1 and the display area of the character image G2 are combined. That is, the display area in which the display area of the pictogram image G1 and the display area of the character image G2 are combined is “large”. The pictogram image G1 and the character image G2 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 28A, and are compared with other plural images (or without being compared with other plural images), and are images of error notification images. Any size can be said to be "large". It should be noted that an image whose image size reaches the upper predetermined number (for example, the fourth) may be referred to as an image size “large”, and an image which does not reach the upper predetermined number may be referred to as an image size “small”. Further, an image in which the ratio of the image size in the display area of the image display device 5 is a predetermined ratio (for example, 30%) or more is referred to as an image size “large”, and an image less than the predetermined ratio is referred to as an image size “small”. Good.

  FIG. 28B shows an effect execution notification image (an example). The effect execution notification image shown in FIG. 28 (B) is a pictogram image G3 capable of specifying the executed notification target effect (step 5 (SU5) of step-up notice effect, group notice effect, character effect). Contains. The pictogram image G3 is a general term for a part or all of the pictogram images G3-1 to G3-3 (described later). The display time of the effect execution notification image (the notification time of the effect execution notification) may be, for example, 20 seconds. The display time of the effect execution notification image may be changed according to the type of the notification target effect.

  The image size of the effect execution notification image shown in FIG. 27A is the display area of the pictogram image G3. That is, the display area of the pictogram image G3 is "small". The pictogram image G3 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 28B, and the image size of the effect execution notification image is "(without comparing with other plural images). Anything that can be said to be "small" will do.

  FIG. 28D shows in detail the vicinity of the pictogram image G3 of FIG. 28B. In FIG. 28 (D), the pictogram image G3-1 notifies the effect having the first notification start order when the number of notifications is 3, and the Z value is “3”. Further, in FIG. 28D, the pictogram image G3-2 notifies the effect having the second notification start order when the number of notifications is 3, and the Z value is “2”. Further, in FIG. 28D, the pictogram image G3-3 notifies the third effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 3, and the Z value is “1”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28D, the pictogram image G3-2 having the Z value "2" is displayed in front of the pictogram image G3-1 having the Z value "3", and the pictogram image G3 having the Z value "2" is displayed. A pictogram image G3-3 having a Z value of "1" is displayed on the front side of -2.

  In FIG. 28 (E), the pictogram image G3-1 indicates the first effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 2, and the Z value is "3". In addition, in FIG. 28E, the pictogram image G3-2 notifies the effect having the second notification start order when the notification number is 2, and the Z value is “2”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28E, the pictogram image G3-2 having the Z value "2" is displayed in front of the pictogram image G3-1 having the Z value "3". Further, in FIG. 28F, the pictogram image G3-1 notifies the effect having the first notification start order when the notification number is 1, and the Z value is "3".

  FIG. 28C shows a character effect effect image (one example). The character effect effect image shown in FIG. 28C includes an effect image G4 that gives a video effect to the character effect (specifically, the movement (movement) of the movable accessory 17). The display time of the character effect effect image (execution time of the character effect effect effect) may be, for example, 30 seconds. The display time of the character effect effect image may be changed depending on the operation mode of the movable accessory 17.

  The image size of the accessory effect effect image shown in FIG. 27A is the display area of the effect image G4. That is, the display area of the effect image G4 is “large”. The effect image G4 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 28C, and the image size of the character effect effect image is compared with that of the other images (or without being compared with the other images). Anything that can be said to be "large" will do.

  FIG. 29 (A) shows a display image (such as an example) for holding. The hold display image shown in FIG. 29A includes a first hold display image G5, a second hold display image G6, and an active display image G7. The display time of the first hold display image G5 and the second hold display image G6 differs depending on the number of hold displays, the time required to consume each hold display (display time of each variable display), and the like. The display time of the active display image G7 varies depending on the display time of the variable display and the like. The hold display image may include an image showing the active display area AHA.

  The image size of the hold display image shown in FIG. 27A is the display area obtained by combining the display area of the first hold display image G5, the display area of the second hold display image G6, and the display area of the active display image G7. Is. That is, the combined display area of the first reserved display image G5, the second reserved display image G6, and the active display image G7 is "small". The first reserved display image G5, the second reserved display image G6, and the active display image G7 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 29A, and are compared with other plural images (or with other plural images). It is sufficient to say that the image size of the display image such as hold is “small” (without comparison).

  FIG. 29B shows a group notice effect image (one example). The group notice effect image shown in FIG. 29 (B) includes character images G8 forming the group. The display time of the character image G8 (the execution time of the group notice effect) may be, for example, 5 seconds. The display time of the group notice effect image may be changed according to the character image G8 displayed in the group notice effect.

  The image size of the group notice effect image shown in FIG. 27B is the display area of the character image G8. That is, the display area of the character image G8 is “large”. The character image G8 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 29B, and is compared with other plural images (or without being compared with plural other images), and the image size of the group notice effect image is " Anything that can be said to be "large."

  FIG. 29C shows a chance zone effect image (an example). The chance zone effect image shown in FIG. 29 (C) includes a character image G9 for notifying the message "Chance !!" and a pictogram image G10 for notifying that it is an opportunity. The chance zone effect image may include one of the character image G9 and the pictogram image G10. The display time of the character image G9 or the pictogram image G10 (execution time of the chance zone effect) varies depending on the number of pending displays, the duration of each pending display (display time of each variable display) and the like.

  The image size of the chance zone effect image shown in FIG. 27 (B) is a display area in which the display area of the character image G9 and the display area of the pictogram image G10 are combined. That is, the display area including the display area of the character image G9 and the display area of the pictogram image G10 is “small”. The character image G9 and the pictogram image G10 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 29C, and are compared with other plural images (or without being compared with other plural images) to create the chance zone effect image. It is sufficient if the image size can be said to be “small”.

  FIG. 29D shows a step-up notice effect image (one example). The step-up notice effect image is the frame image G11 displayed last in step 1 (SU1), the frame image G12 displayed last in step 2 (SU2), the frame image G13 displayed last in step 3 (SU3), step 4 (SU4), the frame image G14 displayed last, and the frame image G15 displayed last in step 5 (SU5) are included. That is, the display area expands each time the step is stepped up. Characters and the like are displayed in the frame images G11 to G15 according to SU1 to SU5, but not shown. The display time of each of the frame image G11 to the frame image G15 may be, for example, 1 second (thus, for example, 5 seconds when proceeding to SU5).

  The image size of the step-up notice effect image shown in FIG. 27B is based on the display area of the frame image G15. That is, the display area of the frame image G15 is “large”. The frame image G15 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 29D, and the image size of the step-up notice effect image is compared with other plural images (or without being compared with other plural images). Anything that can be said to be "large" will do.

  FIG. 30 is a conceptual diagram schematically showing layers of various images. In FIG. 30, the numbers on the Z axis are Z values. According to the setting of the Z value shown in FIG. 27 (B), as shown in FIG. 30, the error notification image having the Z value “0” is displayed in the foreground layer and the effect having the Z value “1”. The execution notification image (third) is displayed on the layer one behind the error notification image, and the effect execution notification image (second) having the Z value “2” is the one behind the effect execution notification image (third). The effect execution notification image (first) displayed on the layer and having the Z value “3” is displayed on the layer one behind the effect execution notification image (second) and has the Z value “4”. The image is displayed on the layer one behind the effect execution notification image (third), and the display image with the Z value "5" is displayed on the layer one behind the character effect effect image, and the Z value " The group notice effect image having "6" is one of the display images such as hold. , The chance zone effect image having the Z value “7” is displayed on the layer one behind the group notice effect image, and the step-up notice effect image having the Z value “8” is the group notice effect image. One is displayed on the back layer.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a display operation example in the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. 31 (A) shows a display operation in the image display device 5 when the execution periods of the step-up notice effect (SU4), the chance zone effect, the group notice effect, the display such as hold, and the effect execution notification (group notice effect) overlap. An example is shown. FIG. 31B shows a step-up notice effect (SU5), a chance zone effect, a group notice effect, a display for holding, etc., a character effect effect notice, an effect execution notice (SU5), an effect execution notice (group notice effect), an effect execution. The example of a display operation in the image display device 5 when the execution periods of the notification (effect production) overlap is shown. As shown in FIGS. 31 (A) and 31 (B), an image having a large Z value is drawn on the back side according to the Z value of FIG. 27 (B), and an image having a small Z value is on the front side. Is drawn so that it overlaps.

  32 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process (step S76). In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prize time effect determination process (step S150). In the effect determination process at the time of winning, the CPU 120 for effect control first checks the contents stored in the start-up winning-time reception command buffer (the first starting-winning-time reception command buffer 194A or the second starting-winning-time reception command buffer 194B). As the received command, a process of determining whether or not a start mouth winning notification command is received, a process of determining an effect such as holding, and the like are executed.

  After the winning effect determination process (step S150), the effect control CPU 120 selects any of the processes of steps S170 to 177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like. Then run.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" which is the initial value. The variable display start waiting process displays an image based on whether the first variation start command (or the second variation start command), the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, or the like transmitted from the main board 11 is received. It includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in the device 5. In the variable display start waiting process, when it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern is started (that is, when the variation pattern designation command or the like is received), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". The variable display start setting process corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the setting for performing the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 (for example, , Processing for performing a production control pattern corresponding to a fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation time), setting of a fluctuation time timer value, and the like, and for performing a display operation such as a first hold display, a second hold display, and an active display. It includes a process of setting (for example, setting of an effect control pattern corresponding to the display operation). In the variable display start setting process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". Whether the variable time timer set in the variable display start setting process (step S171) has timed out in the variable display effect process (the elapsed time after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is the special time variable time). It is included in the process. In the variable display effect processing, when the variable time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

  The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". The special figure hit waiting processing, when the fixed decorative design is “miss”, as the processing which is executed the fluctuation state game state setting processing which sets the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 and the fixed decorative design is “big hit” The process to be executed includes a process of setting for performing a fanfare effect (for example, setting of an effect control pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect). In the special figure hit waiting process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0" when the fixed decorative pattern is "miss", and when the fixed decorative pattern is "big hit", the effect process flag is changed. Update the value to "4".

  The big hit start process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". The big hit start process is a process of determining whether or not a special winning opening opening notification command has been received, and a process during execution when a special winning opening opening notification command is received (special variable winning in each round) It includes processing for performing settings (for example, setting of an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during opening) for performing an effect that is executed when the ball device 7 is in the open state. In the jackpot start process, when the special winning opening opening notification command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5".

  The in-round process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. The process during a round is a process for determining whether or not a notification command after opening the special winning opening is received, and a process during closing when performing a notification command after opening the special winning opening (special variable winning in each round) It includes processing for performing settings (for example, setting of an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during closing) for performing an effect that is executed when the ball device 7 is in the closed state. In the processing during the round, when the notification command after opening the special winning opening is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "6".

  The post-round processing of step S176 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". The post-round processing is a process for determining whether or not a special winning opening opening notification command or a hit end designation command has been received, and a performance during opening as processing executed when a special winning opening opening notification command is received. Settings (for example, setting of the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during opening) and settings for performing the ending effect as the processing executed when the hit end designation command is received (for example, for the ending effect. It includes processing for performing a corresponding effect control pattern and setting of the ending effect execution time timer value). In the post-round processing, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" when the special winning opening opening notification command is received, and the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7" when the hit end designation command is received. To do.

  The post-big hit completion process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". Whether or not the ending production execution time timer set in the post-round processing (step S176) has timed out (whether the elapsed time after the execution of the ending production on the image display device 5 has reached the set time) in the post-jacking completion processing. Whether to determine) or a process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the highly accurate and high base state as a process to be executed when the ending effect execution time timer times out (provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191) The high accuracy flag and the high base flag are set to the ON state), the number of STs and the number of shortening times are set, and the like. In the big hit end post-processing, when the ending effect execution time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value.

  FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of the winning effect determination process (S150). In the effect determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. 33, the CPU 120 for effect control first stores the contents stored in the start winning command command receiving buffer (the first starting winning command receiving command buffer 194A or the second starting winning command buffer 194B). Is checked (step S151), and it is determined whether or not the first start mouth prize designation command is received as a new received command (step S152). When it is determined in step S152 that the first start winning combination designation command has not been received (step S152; NO), the effect control CPU 120 checks the stored contents in the second start winning combination reception command buffer 194B ( (Step S153), it is determined whether or not the second start mouth prize designation command is received as a new reception command (step S153). When it is determined in step S154 that the second start mouth winning award designation command has not been received (step S154; NO), the winning effect determination process is ended.

  When it is determined in step S152 that the first start mouth prize designation command is received (step S152; YES), the effect control CPU 120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Then, it is determined whether or not the time saving state (high-accuracy high-base state) is present (step S152). When it is determined that it is not in the time saving state (step S155: NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process such as holding (step S160A). In the effect determination process for holding, etc. in step S160A, a process for determining the display mode of the first hold display in the first starting winning prize memory display area 5HL (specifically, the effect for holding, etc. in the first starting winning prize memory display area 5HL). Processing for determining whether to execute or not, and processing for determining an effect pattern such as hold when it is determined to execute) are included. Details will be described later.

  After performing the effect determination process for holding or the like (step S160A), the CPU 120 for effect control stores the determination content of the effect determination process for holding or the like (step S160B). Specifically, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the effect of holding or the like in the effect of determining the effect of holding or the like in step S160A, the CPU 120 for effecting the effect of holding or the like determines the effect of holding or the like that is determined in the effect of determining the effect of holding or the like in step S160A. The information indicating the display mode (that is, the display mode at the time of addition and the display mode after each shift specified by the effect pattern for holding, etc.) corresponds to the buffer number of the first start prize in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A. It is stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetching notice buffer 194C. Further, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the effect of holding or the like in the effect of determining effect of holding or the like in step S160A, a normal display mode (for example, white color) is displayed as a display mode at the time of addition and after each shift. ) Is stored in association with the buffer number of the first pre-reading notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning prize in the first start winning award reception command buffer 194A.

  After executing the process of step S160B, the effect control CPU 120 executes the chance zone effect determination process (step S161A), and stores the determination content of the chance zone effect (step S161B). Details of the chance zone effect determination processing will be described later.

  After executing the process of step S161B, the effect control CPU 120 adds the first hold display based on the determination content stored in step S160B (step S162). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 executes (starts) operation control for adding the first hold display to the first start winning award memory display area 5HL in the sixth upper layer (Z value = 5). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays, in the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL, the first hold display in the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetching notice buffer 194C. By setting the production control pattern to be displayed as a usage pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set production control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, Display images (FIG. 27 (A), FIG. 27 (B), FIG. 29 (A)) to which the first hold display is added are displayed. Then, the award winning effect determination process ends.

  When it is determined in step S154 that the second start mouth winning designation command is received (step S154; YES), the effect control CPU 120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Then, it is determined whether or not the time saving state (high-accuracy high-base state) is present (step S156). When it is determined that the time saving state (high-accuracy high-base state) is set (step S156: YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes effect determination processing such as holding (step S163A). The hold effect production determination process of step S163A is the same as the hold effect production determination process of step S160A. That is, in the hold determination effect determination process of step S163A, a process of determining the display mode of the second hold display in the second start prize winning memory display area 5HR (specifically, hold in the second start prize winning memory display area 5HR, etc. Processing for determining whether or not to execute an effect, and processing for determining an effect pattern such as holding when it is determined to execute) are included.

  After performing the effect determination process for holding, etc. (step S163A), the CPU 120 for effect control executes the processes of step S163B, step S164A, step S164B, and step S165, and ends the effect determination process for winning. The respective processes of step S163B, step S164A, step S164B and step S165 relating to the second starting mouth winning are similar to the respective processes of step S160B, step S161A, step S161B and step S162 relating to the first starting mouth winning. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  When it is determined that the time saving state is in step S155 (step S155: YES), or when it is determined that the time saving state is not in step S156 (step S156: NO), the hold addition process according to the start mouth winning award designation is executed. Yes (S166). Specifically, when the first start mouth winning award designation command is received (step S152: YES, step S155: YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold effect etc. in the hold effect effect determination process of step S160A. Similar to the case where it is determined not to be performed, information indicating a normal display mode (for example, white) is stored as a display mode at the time of addition and after each shift, and the first hold display displayed in the normal display mode is first started. Add to the winning memory display area 5HL. Then, the award winning effect determination process ends. On the other hand, when the second start opening winning award designation command is received (step S154: YES, step S156: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the hold effect etc. in the hold effect effect determination process of step S163A. As in the case of, the information indicating the normal display mode (for example, white) is stored as the display mode at the time of addition and after each shift, and the second hold display displayed in the normal display mode is displayed as the second start winning prize memory display. Add to area 5HR. Then, the award winning effect determination process ends.

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the effect determination process for holding or the like (steps S160A and S163A). FIG. 34 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process such as holding. In the effect determination process for holding etc. shown in FIG. 34 (A), the CPU 120 for effect control first sets a plurality of types of effect execution / non-decision determination tables for holding etc. stored in the ROM 121 (holding etc. for non-specific pattern (miss)). Performance execution presence / absence determination table, performance execution presence / absence determination table for specific pattern (miss), hold performance production execution presence / absence determination table for non-specific pattern (big hit), hold performance production presence / absence determination for specific pattern (big hit) From among the tables, select the execution execution presence / absence determination table according to the fluctuation category command (non-specific pattern (miss), specific pattern (miss), non-specific pattern (big hit), specific pattern (big hit)) And set (step S9000).

  FIG. 34B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a determination rate of whether or not to execute an effect such as holding. According to the example shown in FIG. 34 (B), it is determined whether or not the effect such as holding is executed based on the variation category command. That is, when the pattern is a non-specific pattern (miss), the non-execution is determined at a rate of 90%, and the execution is determined at a rate of 10%. When it is a specific pattern (miss), no execution is determined at a rate of 70%, and execution is determined at a rate of 30%. When it is a non-specific pattern (big hit), the non-execution is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution is determined at a rate of 40%. When it is a specific pattern (big hit), no execution is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution is determined at a rate of 80%.

  In each of the effect execution presence / absence determination tables for holding etc., “no execution” and “execution” are determined at the ratios shown in FIG. A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether or not to produce an effect such as holding is assigned to each. For example, in the non-specific pattern (missing) effect execution presence / absence determination table for holding, etc., “no execution” is determined at a rate of 90%, and “execution is performed” is determined at a rate of 10%. Numerical values to be compared with the random number values for determining whether or not the effect of holding or the like is executed are assigned to “without execution” and “with execution”, respectively. In the effect execution presence / absence determination table for a specific pattern (miss), "no execution" is determined at a rate of 70%, and "execution" is determined at a rate of 30%. Numerical values to be compared with the random number values for determining whether or not to perform an effect such as holding is assigned to each of "execution performed" and "execution performed". In the effect execution presence / absence determination table for non-specific patterns (big hits), "no execution" is determined at a rate of 60%, and "execution" is determined at a rate of 40%. A numerical value to be compared with a random number value for determining whether or not to perform the effect such as holding is assigned to each of “” and “execution performed”. In the determination execution presence / absence determination table for the specific pattern (big hit), “no execution” is determined at a rate of 20%, and “execution is performed” is determined at a rate of 80%. Numerical values to be compared with the random number values for determining whether or not to perform an effect such as holding is assigned to each of "execution performed" and "execution performed". In addition, the random number value for determining whether or not to perform an effect such as holding may be updated in the effect random number updating process (step S77), for example.

  Subsequent to the process of step S9000, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the effect of holding or the like, based on the random number value for determining whether or not to execute the effect of holding or the like (step S9001). That is, the effect control CPU 120 uses the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining whether or not to hold effect production, and the determination value of "no execution" or "execution" in the hold or other effect performance determination table set in step S9000. The presence or absence of execution of effects such as holding is determined by comparing

  Following the processing of step S9001, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute an effect such as hold (step S9002). When it is determined to execute the effect such as holding (step S9002; YES), the effect control CPU 120 selects the number of holding memories (the winning is held from among a plurality of types of holding effect pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 121. The effect pattern determination table for holding or the like is selected and set according to the number of items) and the variation category command (step S9003). That is, the effect control CPU 120, when the winning is the first holding (the first holding in the first start winning memory display area 5HL, or the first holding in the second starting winning memory display area 5HR) Set the effect pattern determination table for the hold and the like for the first hold, and the second prize is held (the second hold in the first start prize memory display area 5HL or the second hold in the second start prize memory display area 5HR. If it is the second one, the holding effect pattern determination table for the second holding is set, and the winning is the third holding (the third holding or the second starting in the first start winning memory display area 5HL). If it is the third winning hold memory display area 5HR, a holding and other effect pattern determination table for the third pending game is set, and the fourth winning win is held (first start winning memory display display). Hold 4 th in A 5HL, or sets a hold like effect pattern determination table for holding a fourth point when a hold 4 th) in the second start winning storage display area 5HR.

  Subsequent to the process of step S9003, the effect control CPU 120 determines a holding or the like effect pattern based on a random value for determining the holding or the like effect pattern (step S9004). That is, the CPU 120 for effect control compares the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the effect pattern for hold and the like with the determination value of each effect pattern for effect hold, etc. in the effect pattern determination table for hold etc. set in step S9003. To determine one effect pattern such as holding. Then, the effect determination process such as holding is ended. Note that the random number value for determining the effect pattern such as holding may be updated in the random number updating process for effect (step S77).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect such as hold is not executed (step S9002; NO), the effect control CPU 120 causes the display mode after the addition of the hold display and after each shift, and the white (as the display mode of the active display). A normal display mode) is determined (step S9005). Then, the effect determination process such as holding is ended.

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect pattern such as holding. FIG. 35 (A) shows a holding or the like effect pattern (one example) determined by the holding or the like effect pattern determination table for the third hold. That is, in the hold effect production determination process executed when the winning is the third hold, when it is determined to execute the hold effect (step S9002; YES), the plurality of hold operations shown in FIG. One holding effect pattern is determined from among the equal effect patterns (holding effect pattern "HP1" to "HP14").

  In FIG. 35 (A), “display mode of hold display at third hold position” in the figure is a display mode of hold display at a position after additional display and before the first shift. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display at a position three hours before the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL is completed, or the second hold at a position three minutes before the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR is completed. It is a display mode of display. "Display mode of hold display at second hold position" in the drawing is a display mode of hold display at a position after the first shift and before the second shift. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display at the position two minutes before the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL is completed, or the second hold at the position two minutes before the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR is completed. It is a display mode of display. The “display mode of the hold display at the first hold position” in the figure is a display mode of the hold display at the position after the second shift and before the third shift. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display at the position immediately before the completion of the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL, or the second hold at the position immediately before the completion of the second start prize winning memory display area 5HR. It is a display mode of display.

  In FIG. 35 (A), for example, in the effect pattern “HP1” for holding, etc., white is displayed as the holding display at the third holding position, white is displayed as the holding display at the second holding position, and the holding 1 It is a production pattern such as a white display as a hold display at the position of the third position and a yellow display as an active display. In the production pattern “HP2” for holding and the like, white is displayed as the holding display for the third holding position, white is displayed as the holding display for the second holding position, and yellow is displayed as the holding display for the first holding position. Is displayed, and yellow is displayed as an active display. In the production pattern “HP3” for holding and the like, white is displayed as a holding display for the third holding position, yellow is displayed as a holding display for the second holding position, and yellow is displayed as a holding display for the first holding position. Is displayed, and yellow is displayed as an active display. The holding effect patterns "HP4" to "HP14" are also as shown in FIG.

  Note that FIG. 35 (A) shows a holding etc. effect pattern determined by the holding etc. effect pattern determination table for the third hold, but according to the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the first hold. Hold and other effect patterns determined, hold and other effect pattern determined by the second hold and effect pattern determination table for the second hold, hold and other effect determined by the fourth hold and effect pattern determination table The same applies to the pattern.

  For example, the holding and other effect patterns determined by the holding and other effect pattern determination table for the first holding are “display mode of the hold display at the position of the first holding” and “display mode of the hold display of active display”. What has been set is. The holding and other effect patterns determined by the holding and other effect pattern determination table for the second hold are "display mode of hold display at second hold position" and "display mode of hold display at first hold position. It suffices that "" and "display mode of hold display of active display" are set. The holding and other effect patterns determined by the holding and other effect pattern determination table for the fourth hold are "display mode of hold display at fourth hold position" and "display mode of hold display at third hold position. “Hold display display mode at second hold position”, “Hold display display mode at first hold position”, and “Hold display display mode at active display” are set. Good.

  FIG. 35 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of the effect pattern for holding etc. by the effect pattern determining table for hold etc. for the third hold. According to the example shown in FIG. 35 (B), effects such as holding are produced according to the variation category command (non-specific pattern (miss), specific pattern (miss), non-specific pattern (big hit), and specific pattern (big hit)). The pattern determination rate is different. It should be noted that, in the holding effect pattern determination table for the third holding, one holding effect pattern from the holding effect patterns “HP1” to “HP14” is displayed in accordance with the variation category command in FIG. ), The holding and other effect patterns “HP1” to “HP14” are compared with random numbers (not shown) for determining the hold and other effect patterns according to the variation category command. It suffices that a numerical value (determination value) is assigned.

  For example, in the table referred to when the pattern is a specific pattern (missing), each of the holding and other effect patterns “HP1” to “HP4” is determined at a rate of 23%, and the holding and other effect patterns “HP5” to “HP12”. Each of the holding effect patterns may be assigned a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the hold effect pattern, so that each of them is determined at a rate of 1%. . Further, in the table referred to when it is a non-specific pattern (big hit), each of the holding and other effect patterns "HP1" to "HP4" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the holding and other effect patterns "HP5" to "HP14". If a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the effect pattern for holding etc. is assigned to each effect pattern for holding etc. Good.

  It should be noted that the determination rate of the effect pattern for holding etc. by the effect pattern determination table for the first hold, the determination rate of effect pattern for holding etc. by the effect pattern determination table for the second hold, the rate of the fourth hold Although the determination rate of the effect pattern for holding, etc. by the effect pattern determining table for holding, etc. for the game is omitted, it is the fourth hold, whether it is the first hold, the third hold, or the third hold. In the same manner as when, the effect pattern for holding or the like may be determined.

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the chance zone effect determination processing (steps S161A and S164A). FIG. 36A is a flowchart showing an example of the chance zone effect determination process. In the chance zone effect determination process shown in FIG. 36 (A), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the prize is the third prize or the fourth prize (step S9010). When it is determined that the winning is not the third or fourth winning (step S9010; NO), that is, when the winning is the first or second winning, the chance zone effect determination process is ended.

  When it is determined that the third prize or the fourth prize has been won (step S9010; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the chance zone effect period (the time period during which the chance zone effect is being executed). Yes (step S9011). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect has already been set as the usage pattern, and if it has already been set as the usage pattern, the set contents (execution timing, etc.). ) And the value of the effect control process timer, it may be determined whether or not it is the chance zone effect period. When it is determined that it is the chance zone effect period (step S9011, YES), the chance zone effect determination process is ended.

  When it is determined that it is not the chance zone effect period (step S9011: NO), the effect control CPU 120 has already decided to execute the chance zone effect (the state in which the opportunity zone effect has been determined but has not been executed yet). ) Is determined (step S9012). For example, the effect control CPU 120 has information (described later) indicating that it is a target of chance zone effect in association with one of the buffer numbers of the first prefetching notice buffer 194C (or the second prefetching notice buffer 194D). It may be determined whether or not the chance zone effect execution determination is already completed based on whether or not it is already stored. If it is determined that the chance zone effect execution determination has been completed (step S9012; YES), the chance zone effect determination processing ends.

  If it is determined that the chance zone effect execution determination has not been made (step S9012; NO), the effect control CPU 120 stores a plurality of types of chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination tables (non-specific pattern (miss) chances) stored in the ROM 121. Zone effect execution presence / absence determination table, chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table for specific pattern (miss), chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table for non-specific pattern (big hit), chance zone effect execution presence / absence for specific pattern (big hit) Of the decision table), the chance zone effect execution presence / absence decision table according to the variation category command (non-specific pattern (miss), specific pattern (miss), non-specific pattern (big hit), specific pattern (big hit)) Select and set (step S 013).

  FIG. 36B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination rate of whether or not to execute the chance zone effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 36 (B), the execution / non-execution of the chance zone effect is determined based on the variation category command. That is, when the pattern is a non-specific pattern (miss), the non-execution is determined at a rate of 100%. When the pattern is a specific pattern (miss), non-execution is determined at a rate of 95%, and execution is determined at a rate of 5%. When it is a non-specific pattern (big hit), no execution is determined at a rate of 100%. When it is a specific pattern (big hit), no execution is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution is determined at a rate of 20%.

  In each of the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination tables, as shown in FIG. 36B, "no execution" and "execution" are determined so that "no execution" and "execution" are performed. A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute a chance zone effect is assigned to each. For example, in the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table for the non-specific pattern (miss), “no execution” is determined at a rate of 100%, so that “no execution” and “execution” are given opportunities. A numerical value to be compared with the random number value for determining whether or not to execute the zone effect is assigned. In the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table for the specific pattern (miss), “no execution” is determined at a rate of 95%, and “execution is performed” is determined at a rate of 5%. Numerical values to be compared with the random number values for determining whether or not the chance zone effect is executed are assigned to each of the “execution performed” and the “execution performed”. In the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table for the non-specific pattern (big hit), “no execution” is determined at a rate of 100% so that “no execution” and “execution” each have a chance zone effect. A numerical value to be compared with the random number value for determining whether to execute is assigned. In the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table for the specific pattern (big hit), "no execution" is determined at a rate of 80%, and "execution" is determined at a rate of 20%. Numerical values to be compared with the random number values for determining whether or not the chance zone effect is executed are assigned to each of the “execution performed” and the “execution performed”. The random number value for determining whether or not to execute the chance zone effect may be updated in the effect random number updating process (step S77), for example.

  Following the processing of step S9013, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance zone effect based on the random number value for determining whether or not to execute the chance zone effect (step S9014). That is, the effect control CPU 120 uses the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the chance zone effect execution presence / absence, and the determination value of "no execution" or "execution" in the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table set in step S9013. Whether or not the chance zone effect is executed is determined by comparing, for example. Further, when it is determined to execute the chance zone effect, the effect control CPU 120 buffers the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A (or the second start prize-winning reception command buffer 194B) that stores the pending information of the present prize. The information indicating that the target is the target of the chance zone effect is stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetching notice buffer 194C (or the second prefetching notice buffer 194D) corresponding to the number. Then, the chance zone effect determination process ends.

  In the chance zone effect determination process shown in FIG. 36, when the prize is not the third or fourth prize (step S9010; NO), the chance zone effect is not executed, but the third or fourth prize is won. The chance zone effect may be executed even when it is not the eyes. For example, when the first prize is won, the chance zone effect may be started from the change of the target which is the next change. If no prize is won during the change of the target, the chance zone effect may be ended at the end of the change of the target. In addition, if there is a winning during the fluctuation of the target, unconditionally (or only when the expectation of a big hit of the fluctuation corresponding to the winning is high) until the end of the fluctuation corresponding to the winning The zone effect may be continued, or the chance zone effect may be ended at the end of the target change, as in the case where there is no winning during the change of the target.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 first reads, for example, the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11 to determine whether or not there is a “miss”. It is determined whether or not (step S522). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses the first variable display result notification command for notifying that the variable display result notification command received in the variable display start waiting process of step S170 is that the variable display result is “miss”. If there is, it is determined to be “miss”. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 is the second variable display result notification command for notifying that the variable display result notification command received in the variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a variable display result of 16R probability variation big hit, or variable display. If the result is the third variable display result notification command for notifying that the 8R certainty variation jackpot will be achieved, it is determined not to be "miss".

  When it is determined to be “miss” in step S522 (step S522; YES), the effect control CPU 120 reads the EXT data in the change pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and thereby designates the designated variation. The pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (that is, "PA1-1", "PA2-1", "PA2-2" in FIG. 5) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach (miss)". It is determined whether or not (step S523).

  When it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) that form a non-reach combination (step S524). ). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, the numerical data indicating the random number value for the left definite symbol determination updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the predetermined left fixed design determination table, the left fixed decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative design display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 of the fixed decorative design is determined.

  Next, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the right fixed symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined right fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. For example, by referring to, the right fixed decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative pattern display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 of the fixed decorative patterns is determined. At this time, it may be determined such that the symbol number of the right fixed decorative design is different from the symbol number of the left fixed decorative design by the setting in the right fixed symbol determination table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for medium-decision symbol determination updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and the predetermined medium-determination symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to, etc., the middle fixed decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative design display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 among the fixed decorative designs is determined. In the process of step S524, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination that is the predetermined chance eye symbol may be determined corresponding to the case where the variable symbol announcement is being executed.

  When it is determined in step S523 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbol) forming the reach combination (step S525). . As an example, in the process of step S525, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left and right finalized symbols, which is updated by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted and stored in the ROM 121 or the like in advance. By referring to the predetermined left and right fixed symbol determination table, etc., the fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5. The decorative pattern with the same design number is determined. Furthermore, the numerical data indicating the random number value for medium-decision symbol determination that is updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and the predetermined medium-determination symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is displayed. By referring to the determined decorative design, the medium fixed decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative design display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

  In addition, when the fixed decorative design is a big hit combination, for example, when the design number of the medium fixed decorative design is the same as the design number of the left fixed decorative design and the right fixed decorative design, an arbitrary value ( For example, "1") may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative design so that the fixed decorative design does not become a big hit combination but becomes a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative design, a difference (design difference) between the left fixed decorative design and the right fixed decorative design is determined, and the medium fixed decorative design corresponding to the determined difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S522 that the game is not a "miss" (step S522; NO), that is, when it is a "big hit (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit)", the effect control CPU 120 makes a definite decoration constituting a big hit combination. A combination of symbols (final stop symbols) is determined (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the jackpot confirmed symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like of the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in the ROM 121 or the like in advance. By referring to a predetermined jackpot determination symbol determination table or the like, the display is stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. Decorative designs with the same design number are determined.

  In addition, when determining the combination of the fixed decoration symbols in step S528, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the big hit type (16R certainty variation big hit, 8R certainty variation big hit), presence or absence of promotion effect, and the like. You may decide a design.

  As a specific example, for example, a jackpot combination dedicated to 16R certainty variation jackpot (for example, three identical odd-numbered decorative patterns are lined up) and a jackpot combination dedicated to 8R certainty variation jackpot (for example, even numbered same decorative pattern are In the aspect in which three pieces are arranged side by side, in the case of 16R certainty variation jackpot, either the jackpot combination dedicated to the 16R certainty variation jackpot or the combination of the jackpots dedicated to the 8R certainty variation jackpot may be determined as the fixed decorative design. . At this time, when the jackpot combination dedicated to the 8R probability variable jackpot is determined as the fixed decorative pattern, it is sufficient to notify that the 16R probability variable jackpot is a winning effect by the time 8 rounds are completed as the promotion effect. On the other hand, in the case of the 8R certainty variation big hit, it is sufficient to determine whether the combination of the 8R certainty variation big hits is a big hit combination as the fixed decorative design.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the 2R certainty variation big hit (probability) is not provided, but when the 2R certainty variation big hit (collision) is provided, the combination of the fixed decorative design (final stop symbol) corresponding to the 2R certainty variation big hit (collision probability) is set. You may decide.

  After performing any of the processing of step S524, step S525, and step S528, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the change is a change of the chance zone (step S529A). . For example, the effect control CPU 120 has already stored information indicating that it is the target of the chance zone effect in association with one of the buffer numbers of the first prefetching notice buffer 194C (or the second prefetching notice buffer 194D). Whether or not the change is a change in the chance zone may be determined based on whether or not the change is present.

  When it is determined in step S529A that the change is a change in the chance zone (step S529A; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect as the use pattern (step S529B). . That is, when it is determined that the chance zone effect is to be executed in the chance zone effect determination process (FIG. 36) executed at the time of winning and the information indicating that it is the target is stored (step S9014), it is first executed. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect is set as the usage pattern. As a result, when the chance zone effect is executed at the time of winning, the chance zone effect is started from the next variation (variation first started after the winning).

  When it is determined in step S529A that the change is not a change in the chance zone (step S529A; NO), or after the process of step S529B is performed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the step-up advance notice effect determination process (step. S530A). In the step-up notice production determination process, it is determined whether or not the step-up notice production (one mode of the main notice production) is executed, and when it is determined to execute the step-up notice production, a step-up notice production pattern is determined.

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination rate of whether or not to execute the main notice production (step-up notice production, group notice production, etc.). FIG. 38 (A) is an example of a determination rate of whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect. In FIG. 38 (A) (also in FIGS. 38 (B) and (C)), the variation pattern “PA2-X” represents the variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-2”, and the variation pattern “PA3-X”. Represents a variation pattern "PA3-1" to "PA3-2", a variation pattern "PA4-X" represents a variation pattern "PA4-1" to "PA4-3", and a variation pattern "PA5-X". Represents a variation pattern "PA5-1" to "PA5-3", a variation pattern "PB3-X" represents a variation pattern "PB3-1" to "PB3-2", and a variation pattern "PB4-X". Represents the variation patterns "PB4-1" to "PB4-3", and the variation pattern "PB5-X" represents the variation patterns "PB5-1" to "PB5-3".

  According to the example shown in FIG. 38 (A), whether or not the step-up notice effect is executed is determined based on the variation pattern. That is, when the variation pattern is “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, no execution is determined at a rate of 100%. When the variation pattern is “PA2-X”, the non-execution is determined at a rate of 95%, and the execution is determined at a rate of 5%.

  When the variation pattern is “PA3-X”, the variation pattern is “PB3-X”, the variation pattern is “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, the variation pattern is “PB4-X” or The case of "PB5-X" is also as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, when determining whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect, for example, a variation pattern (variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “PA2-X”, “PA3-” is used. X "," PB3-X "," PA4-X "or" PA5-X "," PB4-X "or" PB5-X "). It is stored in the ROM 121.

  In the above-mentioned step-up notice effect execution presence / absence determination tables, "no execution" and "execution" are determined as "execution" and "execution" as determined by the ratio of FIG. 38 (A). It suffices that a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the presence / absence of step-up notice effect execution is allocated to each of “. For example, in the step-up notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the variation patterns “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “no execution” and “no execution” are determined so that “no execution” is determined at a rate of 100%. A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the presence or absence of step-up notice effect execution may be allocated to each of “execution performed”. Further, for example, in the step-up notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the variation pattern “PA2-X”, “no execution” is determined at a rate of 95%, and “execution is performed” at a rate of 5%. In addition, a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the presence or absence of step-up notice effect execution may be assigned to each of "no execution" and "execution". The random value for determining whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect may be updated in the effect random number updating process (step S77), for example.

  FIG. 38B is an example of the determination rate of the step-up notice effect pattern. In FIG. 38 (B), the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-1 (SU1)” is a step-up notice effect pattern for executing the step-up notice effect (SU1). The step-up notice effect (SU1) is an effect in which the frame image G11 (FIG. 29D) is displayed as the first step in the display area of the image display device 5. The step-up notice production pattern “SYP1-2 (SU2)” is a step-up notice production pattern for executing the step-up notice production (SU2). The step-up notice effect (SU2) is an effect in which the frame image G12 (FIG. 29D) is displayed as the second step following the first step in the display area of the image display device 5. The step-up notice production pattern “SYP1-3 (SU3)” is a step-up notice production pattern for executing the step-up notice production (SU3). The step-up notice effect (SU3) is an effect in which the frame image G13 (FIG. 29D) is displayed as the third step following the first step and the second step in the display area of the image display device 5. The step-up notice production pattern “SYP1-4 (SU4)” is a step-up notice production pattern for executing the step-up notice production (SU4). The step-up notice effect (SU4) is an effect for displaying the frame image G14 (FIG. 29 (D)) as the fourth step following the first step, the second step, and the third step in the display area of the image display device 5. is there. The step-up notice production pattern “SYP1-5 (SU5)” is a step-up notice production pattern for executing the step-up notice production (SU5). The step-up notice effect (SU5) displays the frame image G15 (FIG. 29D) as the fifth step following the first step, the second step, the third step, and the fourth step in the display area of the image display device 5. It is an effect to be displayed.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 38 (B), the variation patterns (variation patterns “PA2-X”, “PA3-X”, “PB3-X”, “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, “PB4-X”). Or "PB5-X"), the step-up notice effect pattern is determined. That is, when the variation pattern is "PA2-X", the step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-1 (SU1)" is determined at a rate of 85%, and the step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-2 (SU2)" is determined. It is determined at a rate of 15%. When the variation pattern is "PA3-X", the step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-1 (SU1)" is determined at a rate of 40%, and the step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-2 (SU2)" is 30%. The step-up preliminary announcement effect pattern "SYP1-3 (SU3)" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the step-up preliminary announcement effect pattern "SYP1-4 (SU4)" is determined at a rate of 10%. .

  FIG. 38B also shows the case of the variation pattern “PB3-X”, the variation pattern “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, and the variation pattern “PB4-X” or “PB5-X”. Since it is the same, the description is omitted.

  When determining the step-up notice effect pattern as shown in FIG. 38B, for example, a variation pattern (variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “PA2-X”, “PA3-X”). , "PB3-X", "PA4-X" or "PA5-X", "PB4-X" or "PB5-X") stored in the ROM 121. To do.

  In the step-up notice production pattern determination tables described above, the step-up notice production patterns are set to the step-up notice production patterns so that the step-up notice production patterns are determined at the rate shown in FIG. 38 (B). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for pattern determination may be assigned. For example, in the step-up notice effect pattern determination table for the variation pattern "PA2-X", the step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-1 (SU1)" is determined at a rate of 85%, and the step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1" is determined. "-2 (SU2)" is determined at a rate of 15%, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the step-up notice effect pattern for each step-up notice effect pattern. Should be assigned. Further, for example, in the step-up notice effect pattern determination table for the variation pattern "PA3-X", the step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-1 (SU1)" is determined at a rate of 40%, and the step-up notice effect pattern " "SYP1-2 (SU2)" is determined at a rate of 30%, step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-3 (SU3)" is determined at a rate of 20%, and step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-4 (SU4)" is determined. 10%, the step-up notice production pattern is assigned a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the step-up notice production pattern. Good. The random number value for determining the step-up notice effect pattern may be updated in the effect random number updating process (step S77), for example.

  That is, in the step-up advance notice effect determination process (step S530A) of the variable display start setting process (step S171) shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 first responds to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command. Set (select) the step-up notice production execution presence / absence determination table, and numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the step-up notice production execution presence / absence, and "no execution" or "execution" in the set step-up notice production execution presence / absence determination table Whether or not the step-up notice effect is executed is determined by, for example, comparing the determination value with “existence”. Then, when it is determined to execute the step-up notice production, the effect control CPU 120 sets (selects) a step-up notice production pattern determination table corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, and steps up. By comparing the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the notice production pattern with the determination value of each step-up notice production pattern in the set step-up notice production pattern determination table, one step-up notice production pattern is determined. decide.

  After executing the step-up notice effect determination process of step S530A, the group notice effect determination process is executed (step S530B). In the group notice effect determination process, whether or not to execute the group notice effect (one mode of the main notice effect) is determined.

  FIG. 38C is an example of the determination rate of whether or not to execute the group notice effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 38C, whether or not to execute the group notice effect is determined based on the variation pattern. Specifically, when the variation pattern is "PA1-1" or "PB1-1", when it is the variation pattern "PA2-X", when it is the variation pattern "PA3-X", or when the variation pattern " When it is “PB3-X”, no execution is determined at a rate of 100%. When the variation pattern is “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, the non-execution is determined at a rate of 95%, and the execution is determined at a rate of 5%. When the variation pattern is "PB4-X" or "PB5-X", the non-execution is determined at a rate of 80% and the execution is determined at a rate of 20%.

  As shown in FIG. 38C, when determining whether or not to execute the group notice effect, for example, a variation pattern (variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “PA2-X”, “PA3-X”). , "PB3-X", "PA4-X" or "PA5-X", "PB4-X" or "PB5-X") in the ROM 121. Remember.

  In the respective group notice effect execution presence / absence determination tables described above, "no execution" and "execution" are determined as "execution" and "execution" as determined by the ratio of FIG. 38 (C). It is sufficient that a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the presence / absence of group announcement effect execution is assigned to each of the above. For example, in the group notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “no execution” and “execution” are performed so that “no execution” is determined at a rate of 100%. A numerical value (determination value) that is compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the presence / absence of group notice effect execution may be assigned to each of “present”. Further, for example, in the group notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the variation patterns “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, “no execution” is determined at a rate of 95%, and “execution is performed” at a rate of 5%. As will be determined by, a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the presence / absence of group announcement effect execution may be assigned to each of “no execution” and “execution”. .. The random number value for determining the presence / absence of the group announcement effect may be updated in the effect random number updating process (step S77), for example.

  That is, in the group announcement effect determination process (step S530B) of the variable display start setting process (step S171) shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 first sets the group according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. Set (select) the preliminary announcement effect execution / non-execution determination table, determine the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the group preliminary announcement effect execution / non-execution, and determine whether "not executed" or "executed" in the set group preliminary effect execution / non-execution determination table Whether or not the group notice effect is executed is determined by comparing with the value.

  After executing the group notice effect determination process of step S530B, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold digestion process (step S531). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 executes (starts) operation control for shifting the hold display in the sixth upper layer (Z value = 5). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 starts changing the decorative design in conjunction with the first special drawing game (when the variable display of the decorative design this time is linked to the first special drawing game). ), The hold display after the shift or the active display based on the hold or the like effect pattern (that is, the content stored in step S160B) determined in the hold or the like effect determination process (step S160A) of the prize time effect determination process (step S150). A production control pattern corresponding to the display mode is set as a usage pattern, and a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set production control pattern is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The display mode of the hold display after the shift or the active display determined in the effect determination process such as the hold Corresponding hold such as a display image (FIG. 27 (A), FIG. 27 (B), FIG. 29 (A)) to display a. The same applies to when the variation of the decorative design is started in association with the second special figure game (when the variable display of the decorative design this time is linked to the second special figure game).

  After executing the hold digestion process of step S531, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation as a usage pattern (step S532). That is, the effect control CPU 120 sets, as the usage pattern, the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. Accordingly, for example, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern of the super reach β, the effect control pattern including the movable accessory control data for operating the movable accessory 17 is set as the usage pattern. . If it is determined in the step-up notice production determination process (step S530A) that the step-up notice production is to be executed, the production control pattern corresponding to the determined step-up notice production pattern is set as the usage pattern. If it is determined in the group notice effect determination process (step S530B) that the group notice effect is to be executed, the effect control pattern corresponding to the group notice effect is set as the usage pattern.

  After executing the process of step S532, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern set in step S532 (step S534), and starts the effect control process timer. (Step S535), the effect device such as the image display device 5 is controlled according to the contents of the process data (step S536).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. 5) specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command in the fluctuation time timer (step S537).

  After executing the process of step S537, the effect control CPU 120 consumes the command stored in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A or the second starting winning prize reception command buffer 194B (step S538). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 has the smallest command among the commands stored in the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the first special figure game. The command (1 set) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number (buffer number "1") is deleted, and the buffer number of the command to be deleted is set to be larger in the first start winning prize received command buffer 194A. The commands stored in the corresponding areas are shifted while maintaining the winning order. Further, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, has the smallest buffer number among the commands stored in the second start prize-winning reception command buffer 194B ( The command (1 set) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1”) is deleted, and the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command to be deleted in the second start winning award received command buffer 194B. Each command stored in is shifted while maintaining the winning order. Further, in the processing of step S538, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the information stored in the first prefetching advance notice buffer 194C or the second prefetching advance notice buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 or the like corresponds to the deletion or shift of the command. It is also deleted and shifted. Further, in the process of step S538, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores the command to be deleted (the symbol designating command of the variation, the variation category command, etc.) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  Following the processing of step S538, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" which is the value corresponding to the effect display during variable display (step S539), and ends the variable display start setting processing. ..

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect process (step S172). FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the chance zone effect operation control processing and the like. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of group notice effect operation control processing and the like. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect execution notification operation control process.

  In the effect display during variable display shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the variable time timer value (step S540), and determines whether or not the variable time timer value becomes 0 (step S541). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable time timer has timed out. When the variable time timer value becomes 0 (step S541; YES), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3" which is the value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S548). ), The display process during variable display ends.

  When the variable time timer value is not 0 (step S541; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes operation control such as variable display of decorative symbols in the tenth layer from the top (Z value = 9) ( Start and continue) (step S542). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 issues a display control command specified by the display control data, which is included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern set as the usage pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). By transmitting to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, an image including a decorative pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed.

  After performing the process of step S542, a chance zone effect operation control process is performed (step S543).

  FIG. 40 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the chance zone effect operation control processing (step S543). In the chance zone effect operation control process shown in FIG. 40A, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the change is a change in the chance zone (step S9020). For example, the effect control CPU 120 has already stored information indicating that it is the target of the chance zone effect in association with one of the buffer numbers of the first prefetching notice buffer 194C (or the second prefetching notice buffer 194D). Whether or not the change is a change in the chance zone may be determined based on whether or not the change is present. When it is determined that the change is not the change of the chance zone (step S9020; NO), the chance zone effect operation control process is ended.

  When it is determined that the change is a change in the chance zone (step S9020; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation control of the opportunity zone effect in the eighth layer from the top (Z value = 7) ( Start and continue) (step S9021). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect set as the usage pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). Is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 to display a chance zone effect image (see FIGS. 27A, 27B, and 29C) corresponding to the chance zone effect. .

  In addition, when it is determined to execute the chance zone effect in the determination (step S9014) of whether or not to execute the chance zone effect in the chance zone effect determination process (see FIG. 36 (A)), the number of held memories (the number of winning winnings). The chance zone continuation counter is set according to whether or not) (for example, the count value is "1" for the first hold, the count value is "2" for the second hold, and the hold 3 For example, the count value is set to "3" when the number is the fourth and the count value is set to "4" when the number is the fourth hold, and the chance zone continuation counter may be decremented by 1 for each shift. The chance zone continuation counter may be provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193.

  As described above, when the chance zone continuation counter is used, in the process of step S9020, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation is a chance zone variation based on the value of the chance zone continuation counter. You may.

  After executing the chance zone effect operation control processing of step S543, step-up notice effect operation control processing is executed (step S544).

  FIG. 40 (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the step-up notice effect operation control process (step S544). In the step-up notice production operation control process shown in FIG. 40B, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is a step-up notice production period (a period in which the step-up notice production is executed) (step). S9030). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the step-up notice effect pattern has already been set as the usage pattern, and the content set if it has already been set as the usage pattern (execution). Whether or not it is the step-up notice production period may be determined based on the timing etc.) and the value of the production control process timer. When it is determined that it is not the step-up notice effect period (step S9030; NO), the step-up notice effect operation control process is ended.

  When it is determined that it is the step-up notice production period (step S9030; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation control of the step-up notice production in the ninth highest layer (Z value = 8). , And continue) (step S9031). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the display specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the step-up notice effect pattern set as the usage pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). By transmitting the control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the step-up notice effect images (FIGS. 27A, 27B, and 27B) corresponding to the step-up notice effects (SU1 to SU5) are displayed. 29 (D)) is displayed.

  After executing the process of step S9031, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the SU5 execution flag indicating that the step-up notice effect (SU5) has been executed is in the on state (step S9032). The SU5 execution flag may be provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. When the SU5 execution flag is in the on state (step S9032; YES), the step-up notice effect operation control process is ended.

  When the SU5 execution flag is not on (step S9032; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the step-up notice effect (SU5) has been executed (step S9033). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the step-up notice effect pattern is set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (step S171), and when it is set as the use pattern. May determine whether or not the step-up notice effect (SU5) has been executed based on the set contents (such as the execution timing of SU5) and the value of the effect control process timer. When the step-up notice effect (SU5) is not executed (step S9033; NO), the step-up notice effect operation control process is ended. When the step-up notice effect (SU5) is executed (step S9033; YES), the SU5 execution flag is set to the on state (step S9034), and the step-up notice effect operation control process is ended.

  After executing the step-up notice effect operation control process of step S544, the group notice effect operation control process is executed (step S545).

  FIG. 41 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the group notice effect operation control process (step S545). In the group announcement effect operation control process shown in FIG. 41 (A), the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is a group announcement effect period (a period in which the group announcement effect is executed) (step S9040). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the group notice effect is set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (step S171), and if it is set as the use pattern, the effect control pattern is set. Whether or not the period is the group notice production period may be determined based on the contents (the execution timing of the group notice production, etc.) and the value of the production control process timer. When it is determined that it is not the group notice production period (step S9040; NO), the group notice production operation control process is ended.

  When it is determined that it is during the group notice production period (step S9040; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation control of the group notice production in the seventh layer from the top (Z value = 6) (start, continue). ) (Step S9041). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the group notice effect set as the usage pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). Is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, thereby displaying a group notice effect image (see FIGS. 27A, 27B, and 29B) corresponding to the group notice effect. .

  After executing the process of step S9041, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the group announcement effect execution flag indicating that the group announcement effect has been executed is in the ON state (step S9042). The group announcement effect execution flag may be provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. When the group notice effect execution flag is in the on state (step S9042; YES), the group notice effect operation control process is ended.

  When the group notice production execution flag is not on (step S9042; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the group notice production execution flag to the on state (step S9043), and ends the group notice production operation control process.

  After performing the group notice production operation control processing in step S545, the accessory movement control processing is executed (step S546).

  FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing an example of the accessory motion control process (step S546). In the accessory operation control process shown in FIG. 41 (B), the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is an accessory operation period (a period in which the movable accessory 17 is operated) (step S9050). For example, the effect control CPU 120, in the variable display start setting process (step S171), is the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern of super reach β) accompanying the operation of the movable accessory 17 set as the usage pattern. If it is set as a usage pattern, whether or not it is a group notice production period based on the set contents (operation timing of the movable accessory 17 etc.) and the value of the production control process timer. You may judge. When it is determined that it is not during the accessory action period (step S9050; NO), the accessory action control process is ended.

  When it is determined that it is during the accessory action period (step S9050; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the action control of the movable accessory 17 (step S9051). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the movable winning combination included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern of super reach β) set as the usage pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). The movable accessory 17 is operated by transmitting a control command designated by the object control data to the accessory control board 16.

  Following the processing of step S9051, the effect control CPU 120 executes (starts and continues) operation control of the accessory effect effect in the fifth upper layer (Z value = 4) (step S9052). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect control pattern (effect effect effect effect) corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern of super reach β) set as the usage pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). (Including the display control data to be executed), the display control command specified by the display control data is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, and the like, thereby a character effect effect image corresponding to the character effect effect. (See FIG. 27A, FIG. 27B, and FIG. 28C) are displayed.

  After executing the process of step S9052, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the accessory effect execution flag indicating that the operation control of the accessory is performed is on (step S9053). The accessory effect execution flag may be provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. When the accessory production execution flag is in the ON state (step S9053; YES), the accessory operation control process is ended.

  When the character effect execution flag is not on (step S9053; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the character effect execution flag on (step S9054), and ends the character operation control process.

  After performing the accessory motion control process of step S546, a performance execution notification motion control process is executed (step S547).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547). In the effect execution notification operation control process shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the notification period of the execution notification of the step-up notice effect (SU5) (step S9060). For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the step-up notice effect (SU5) has already been set as the usage pattern, and if it has already been set as the usage pattern. It may be determined whether or not it is the notification period of the execution notification of the step-up notice effect (SU5) based on the contents (notification timing etc.) and the value of the effect control process timer.

  When it is determined that it is not the notification period of the execution notification of the step-up notice effect (SU5) (step S9060; NO), the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the step-up notice effect (SU5) has been executed. It is determined whether or not is on (step S9061). When the SU5 execution flag is on (step S9061; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the SU5 execution flag to the off state (step S9062).

  When it is determined that it is the notification period of the execution notification of SU5 (step S9060; YES), after performing the processing of step S9062, the effect control CPU 120, the effect control CPU120, the layer according to the notification number, notification start order (Z value = 1 to 3), the operation control of the execution notification of SU5 is executed (started and continued) (step S9063). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the SU5 as the use pattern, and displays the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. A performance execution notification image corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 (FIG. 27 (A), FIG. 27 (B), FIG. 28 (B), FIG. 28 (D), for example, by being transmitted to VDP or the like of the control unit 123. , FIG. 28 (E) and FIG. 28 (F)) are displayed.

  When the SU5 execution flag is not in the ON state (step S9061; NO), or after executing the process of step S9063, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the notification period of execution notification of the group notice effect ( Step S9064). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of the execution of the group notice effect has already been set as the usage pattern, and the content set if it has already been set as the usage pattern ( It may be determined whether or not it is the notification period of execution notification of the group notice effect based on the notification timing and the like) and the value of the effect control process timer.

  When determining that it is not the notification period of the group notice effect execution notification (step S9064; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the group notice effect execution flag indicating that the group notice effect has been executed is in the ON state. It is determined whether or not (step S9065). When the group notice effect execution flag is on (step S9065; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the group notice effect execution flag to the off state (step S9066).

  When it is determined that it is the notification period of the group notice effect execution notification (step S9064; YES), or after the process of step S9066 is performed, the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of notifications and the layer (Z With the value = 1 to 3), the operation control of the execution notification of the group notice effect is executed (started and continued) (step S9067). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of execution of the group notice effect as a usage pattern, and a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern that is set. Is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, and the like, and an effect execution notification image corresponding to the execution notification of the group notice effect (FIG. 27A, FIG. 27B, FIG. 28B, FIG. 28 (D), FIG. 28 (E), and FIG. 28 (F)) are displayed.

  When the group notice effect execution flag is not in the on state (step S9065; NO), or after the processing of step S9067 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the notification period of the execution notification of the accessory effect. Yes (step S9068). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the performance notification of the accessory effect has already been set as the usage pattern, and the content set if the usage control pattern has already been set ( It may be determined whether or not it is the notification period of the notification of execution of the accessory effect based on the notification timing etc.) and the value of the effect control process timer.

  When it is determined that it is not the notification period of the execution notification of the character effect (step S9068; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the character effect execution flag is in the ON state (step S9069). When the accessory effect execution flag is not on (step S9069; NO), the effect execution notification operation control process is ended. When the accessory effect execution flag is on (step S9069; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the effect effect execution flag to the off state (step S9070).

  When it is determined that it is the notification period of the notification of execution of the accessory effect (step S9068; YES), or after the process of step S9070 is performed, the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of notifications and the layer (Z according to the notification start order). With the value = 1 to 3), the operation control of the execution notification of the accessory effect is executed (started and continued) (step S9071). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of the execution of the accessory effect as the use pattern, and the display control command designated by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. Is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, and the like, and an effect execution notification image corresponding to the execution notification of the accessory effect (FIG. 27A, FIG. 27B, FIG. 28B, FIG. 28 (D), FIG. 28 (E), and FIG. 28 (F)) are displayed. Then, the effect execution notification operation control process is ended.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the special figure waiting process (step S173). In the special symbol winning waiting process shown in FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a symbol fixing designation command has been received (step S720). When it is determined that the symbol confirmation designation command has not been received (step S720; NO), the special symbol winning waiting process is ended.

  When it is determined that the symbol confirmation designation command is received (step S720; YES), the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the confirmed decorative symbol (step S722). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the confirmed decorative design is a jackpot design (step S723). When the fixed decorative design is not the big hit design (step S723: NO), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S726), The special figure hit waiting process ends.

  When the confirmed decorative design is the big hit design (step S723: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command is received (step S730). When it is determined that the hit start designation command has not been received (step S730; NO), the special figure hit waiting process ends.

  When it is determined that the hit start designation command is received (step S730; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the fanfare effect (step S733), and sets the value of the effect process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit start processing. Is updated to "4" (step S734), and the special figure hit waiting process ends.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a display operation example in the display area of the image display device 5. 44 (A) to 44 (E) show the display operations arranged in time series. In FIG. 44A and the like, the arrow “↓” shown in the display area of the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing.

  FIG. 44 (A) is a final stop symbol (left symbol “4”, middle symbol “1”, right symbol “6”) in the variable display corresponding to the one of the pending displays M0 (not shown) before the pending display M1. Shows the scene that is stopped. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 44 (A), an image of a decorative design including a final stop design (Z value = 9) and a first hold display image G5 (hold display M1, M2, M3). And a display image (Z value = 5) including a hold is displayed.

  The decorative pattern image is set as a production control pattern corresponding to a variation pattern or the like in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37), and becomes a production control pattern in the variable display effect process (see FIG. 39). The display control command specified by the included display control data is displayed by being transmitted to the display control unit 123. The hold display image is set with a production control pattern corresponding to the display mode of the hold display or the active display as a use pattern in the winning effect determination process (see FIG. 33) or the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). The display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern is displayed by being transmitted to the display control unit 123.

  It is assumed that the hold display M3 is additionally displayed based on the first start winning that has occurred during the variable display corresponding to the hold display M0 (not shown) (step S162 of the winning-time effect determination process of FIG. 33). . When the hold display M3 is additionally displayed, it is assumed that execution of the chance zone effect targeting the hold display M3 is determined in the chance zone effect determination process (step S161A) (step of FIG. 36 (A)). S9014).

  FIG. 44B shows a scene in which a variable display corresponding to the hold display M1 is being performed. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 44 (B), an image of a decorative pattern (Z value = 9) including a changing decorative pattern, and a first hold display image G5 (hold display M2, M3) And a display image (Z value = 5) including the active display image G7 (active display M1) and a chance zone effect image (Z value = 7) including the character image G9 and the pictogram image G10 are displayed. There is.

  In the chance zone effect image, the effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect is set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37), and in the chance zone effect operation control process (see FIG. 40A). The display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern is displayed by being transmitted to the display control unit 123.

  In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the hold display M1 is assumed to be a variation pattern (variation pattern of super reach β) accompanying the operation of the movable accessory 17. Further, when the hold display M1 is exhausted, it is assumed that execution of the step-up notice effect (SU4) and execution of the group notice effect are determined in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37).

  FIG. 44 (C) shows a scene following FIG. 44 (B). In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 44 (C), an image of a decorative pattern (Z value = 9) including a changing decorative pattern, and a first hold display image G5 (hold display M2, M3) And the display image (Z value = 5) including the active display image G7 (active display M1), the chance zone effect image (Z value = 7) including the character image G9 and the pictogram image G10, and the frame image G14 A step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) including is displayed. In FIG. 44 (C), a character or the like is displayed as SU4 in the frame image G14, but it is not shown. The same applies to FIGS. 44D to 44E.

  In the step-up notice production image, the production control pattern corresponding to the step-up notice production pattern is set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37), and the step-up notice production operation control process (see FIG. ) Reference), the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern is transmitted to the display control unit 123 and displayed.

  FIG. 44 (D) shows a scene following FIG. 44 (C). In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 44D, an image of a decorative design (Z value = 9) including a changing decorative design, and a first reserved display image G5 (reserved displays M2, M3). And the display image (Z value = 5) including the active display image G7 (active display M1), the chance zone effect image (Z value = 7) including the character image G9 and the pictogram image G10, and the frame image G14 Step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) including a group notice effect image (Z value = 6) including a character image G8, and effect execution including a pictogram image G3-1 corresponding to notification of execution of group notice effect The notification image (Z value = 3) is displayed.

  In the group notice production image, the production control pattern corresponding to the group notice production is set as a use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37), and in the group notice production operation control process (see FIG. 41A). The display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern is displayed by being transmitted to the display control unit 123. The effect execution notification image corresponding to the notification of execution of the group notice effect is set and set with the effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of execution of the group notice effect in the effect execution notice operation control (see FIG. 42). The display control command specified by the display control data included in the control pattern is displayed by being transmitted to the display control unit 123.

  FIG. 44 (E) shows a scene following FIG. 44 (D). In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 44 (E), an image of a decorative pattern (Z value = 9) including a changing decorative pattern, and a first hold display image G5 (hold display M2, M3) And the display image (Z value = 5) including the active display image G7 (active display M1), the chance zone effect image (Z value = 7) including the character image G9 and the pictogram image G10, and the frame image G14 Step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) including a group notice effect image (Z value = 6) including a character image G8, and effect execution including a pictogram image G3-1 corresponding to notification of execution of group notice effect An effect image (Z value = 3), a character effect effect effect image (Z value = 4) including an effect image G4, and an effect execution notification image (Z) including a pictogram image G3-2 corresponding to the effect effect effect notification. Value = 2) and It is displayed. Note that, in FIG. 44 (E), the movable accessory 17 that has moved (lowered) is not shown. The same applies to FIG. 45 (F).

  In the effect display image for character effect, the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern of super reach β) is set as the usage pattern in the variable display start setting processing (see FIG. 37), and the character effect control processing (FIG. 41 (B)), the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern is transmitted to the display control unit 123 and displayed. The effect execution notification image corresponding to the effect notification of the character effect is set with the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect notification of the effect effect set in the effect execution notification operation control (see FIG. 42). The display control command specified by the display control data included in the control pattern is displayed by being transmitted to the display control unit 123.

  As shown in FIG. 44, an image having a small Z value is displayed on the front layer, and an image having a large Z value is displayed on the rear layer.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a display operation example in the display area of the image display device 5. 45 (A) to 44 (F) show the display operations arranged in time series. In FIG. 45 (A) and the like, the arrow “↓” shown in the display area of the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing.

  FIG. 45 (A) shows a final stop symbol (left symbol "2", middle symbol "8", right symbol "8") in the variable display corresponding to the one before the hold indicator M20 (not shown) of the hold indicator M21. Shows the scene that is stopped. The display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45 (A) includes an image (Z value = 9) of a decorative design including a final stop design, and a first hold display image G5 (hold display M21, M22). A display image (Z value = 5) and the like are displayed.

  FIG. 45 (B) shows a scene in which a variable display corresponding to the hold display M21 is being performed. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45 (B), an image of a decorative design (Z value = 9) including a changing decorative design, a first hold display image G5 (hold display M22), and an active image are displayed. A holding display image (Z value = 5) including the display image G7 (active display M21) is displayed.

  In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the hold display M21 is assumed to be a variation pattern (variation pattern of super reach β) accompanying the operation of the movable accessory 17. Further, it is assumed that when the hold display M21 is exhausted, execution of the step-up notice effect (SU5) and execution of the group notice effect are determined in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37).

  FIG. 45 (C) shows a scene following FIG. 45 (B). In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45 (C), an image of a decorative design (Z value = 9) including a changing decorative design, a first reserved display image G5 (reserved display M22), and an active image. Hold display image (Z value = 5) including display image G7 (active display M21), step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) including frame image G15, and pictogram image corresponding to execution notification of SU5 An effect execution notification image (Z value = 3) including G3-1 is displayed. In FIG. 45 (C), a character or the like is displayed as SU5 in the frame image G15, but it is not shown. The same applies to FIGS. 45 (D) to 45 (F). Further, in FIG. 45C, the changing decorative pattern is visible in the area other than the frame image G15, but is not shown. The same applies to FIGS. 45 (D) to 45 (F).

  The effect execution notification image corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 is included in the effect control pattern set and the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 in the effect execution notification operation control (see FIG. 42) is set. The display control command specified by the displayed display control data is transmitted to the display control unit 123 and displayed.

  FIG. 45 (D) shows a scene following FIG. 45 (C). In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45 (D), an image of a decorative pattern (Z value = 9) including a changing decorative pattern, a first reserved display image G5 (reserved display M22), and an active image are displayed. Hold display image (Z value = 5) including display image G7 (active display M21), step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) including frame image G15, and pictogram image corresponding to execution notification of SU5 An effect execution notification image (Z value = 3) including G3-1, a group notice effect image (Z value = 6) including a character image G8, and a pictogram image G3-1 corresponding to execution notice of the group notice effect are included. A performance execution notification image (Z value = 2) is displayed.

  FIG. 45 (E) shows a scene following FIG. 45 (D). In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45 (E), an image of a decorative design (Z value = 9) including a changing decorative design, a first reserved display image G5 (reserved display M22), and an active image. Hold display image (Z value = 5) including display image G7 (active display M21), step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) including frame image G15, and pictogram image corresponding to execution notification of SU5 An effect execution notification image including G3-1 (Z value = 3), a group notice effect image including a character image G8 (Z value = 6), and a pictogram image G3-2 corresponding to execution notice of the group notice effect are included. Effect execution notification image (Z value = 2), character effect effect image (Z value = 4) including effect image G4, and effect execution notification image including pictogram image G3-3 corresponding to character effect execution notification. (Z value = 1 Bets are displayed.

  FIG. 45 (F) shows a scene in which a magnetic abnormality has occurred in the state of FIG. 45 (E). In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45 (F), in addition to the screens of FIG. 45 (E), an error notification image (Z value = 0) including a pictogram image G1 and a character image G2 is displayed. Has been done.

  As shown in FIG. 44, an image having a small Z value is displayed on the front layer, and an image having a large Z value is displayed on the rear layer.

  Also, effects other than the above-described effects can be executed. For example, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect related to opening of the normally variable winning ball device 6B.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of a predetermined effect process for executing a predetermined effect related to the opening of the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 46 is executed, for example, before the winning effect determination process of the effect control process process (see FIG. 32). In addition, in FIG. 46, the predetermined effect related to the opening of the normal variable winning ball device 6B is simply referred to as a predetermined effect.

  In the predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a predetermined effect in-execution flag indicating that the predetermined effect is being executed is set (step S731). When the predetermined effect executing flag is set in step S731 (that is, when the predetermined effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 120 causes the predetermined effect timer for measuring the effect period of the predetermined effect. Is decremented by 1 (step S734), and it is determined whether the value of the predetermined effect timer has become 0 (step S735A). When the value of the predetermined effect timer is not 0 (step S735A; NO), the operation control of the predetermined effect (see FIG. 48A described later) is executed (continued) (step S735B), and the predetermined effect process is performed. To finish. When the value of the predetermined effect timer has become 0 (step S735A; YES), the predetermined effect is ended (step S736), the predetermined effect executing flag is reset (step S737), and the predetermined effect process is ended.

  If the predetermined effect execution flag is not set in step S731 (step S731; NO), the effect control CPU 120, the normal symbol fluctuation start designation command (normal symbol fluctuation start designation (hit) command or normal symbol fluctuation start Designation (miss) command) Indicates that the normal symbol fluctuation start designation command reception flag (normal symbol fluctuation start designation (hit) command reception flag or normal symbol fluctuation start designation (miss) command reception flag) is set It is determined whether or not (step S751). When the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is not set (step S751; NO), the predetermined effect process is ended.

  When the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is set (step S751; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current game state is the high base state based on the time saving flag. Yes (step S752). When the current game state is the high base state (step S752; YES), the predetermined effect process ends.

  When the current game state is not the high base state (step S752; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the big hit game state (step S753). Whether or not it is a jackpot gaming state may be determined by, for example, the value of the effect process flag. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that it is in the big hit game state when the value of the effect process flag is 4 or more. When it is a big hit game state (step S753; YES), the predetermined effect process ends.

  When it is not the big hit game state (step S753; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the decorative design is changing (step S755). Whether or not the decorative pattern is changing may be determined by, for example, the value of the effect process flag. When the decorative pattern is not changing (step S755; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not one minute or more has elapsed after the change of the decorative pattern is finished (step S757). For example, a timer for measuring the time after the variation of the decorative pattern is finished may be prepared, and it may be determined whether or not 1 minute or more has elapsed according to the measured value of the timer. When 1 minute or more has passed (step S757; YES), the predetermined effect process ends. When 1 minute or more has not elapsed (step S757; NO), the process proceeds to step S759.

  It should be noted that ending the process when one minute or more has elapsed after the variation of the decorative design is considered that the player continues the game for a while after the variation of the decorative design is completed. This is because. Further, the above 1 minute is a little longer than the time (12 seconds × 4) based on the variation time (12 seconds) of the normal symbol in the low base state and the upper limit value 4 of the number of gate passing memories (the number of ordinary symbol reservations). This is because it may be better to execute the process of step S759 until the time (60 seconds) elapses.

  When the decorative pattern is changing (step S755; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the predetermined effect and the type (step S759).

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a determination rate of whether or not to execute a predetermined effect. In the process of step S759, the effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, whether or not to execute a predetermined effect, etc., at a rate as shown in FIG. That is, the predetermined effect execution presence / absence determination table is assigned with a determination value to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining the predetermined effect execution presence / absence so that the ratio is as shown in FIG. 47.

  In the process of step S759, the effect control CPU 120, when the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag is set, has a predetermined effect execution (notification "x"), has a predetermined effect execution (notification " ◯)), predetermined effect execution existence (notification “x” → “○”), for determining whether or not the predetermined effect execution is performed such that the ratio of each predetermined effect execution does not become the “per ordinary symbol” in FIG. 47. The determination value to be compared with the random number (not shown) is predetermined performance execution (notification “x”), predetermined performance execution (notification “〇”), predetermined performance execution (notification “x” → “○”), By selecting a table assigned to each of the predetermined effect execution non-execution, and comparing the random number (not shown) for determining the predetermined effect execution presence or absence and the determination value, the predetermined effect execution existence (notification "x"), Predetermined performance execution (notification "○"), predetermined performance execution (report Knowledge “×” → “◯”), or no execution of a predetermined effect may be determined. Further, the effect control CPU 120, if the normal symbol variation start designation (miss) command reception flag is set, the predetermined effect execution (notification "x"), the predetermined effect execution (notification "○"), Predetermined effect execution existence (notification "x" → "○"), so that the ratio of each predetermined effect non-execution becomes the ratio of "ordinary symbol loss" of FIG. The judgment value to be compared with (shown in the figure) is predetermined performance execution (notification “x”), predetermined performance execution (notification “〇”), predetermined performance execution yes (notification “x” → “○”), no predetermined performance execution By selecting the table assigned to each of the above, and comparing the random number (not shown) for determining the presence or absence of predetermined effect execution with the determination value, the predetermined effect execution is performed (notification “x”), the predetermined effect execution is performed. (Notification “○”), Execution of predetermined performance (Notification “×” → “○”), place It may be determined either demonstration execution no. The execution of a predetermined effect (notification “x”) is to execute a predetermined effect displaying “x”. Execution of predetermined effect (notification “◯”) is to execute a predetermined effect displaying “◯”. Execution of predetermined effect (notification “×” → “◯”) is to execute a predetermined effect of displaying “◯” after displaying “×”. No execution of predetermined effect means that the predetermined effect is not executed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 resets the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag when executing the process of step S759. Further, the effect control CPU 120 also resets the set normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag even when the process of step S759 is not executed due to the determination of “YES” in steps S752, S753, and S755.

  Following the processing of step S759, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the predetermined effect by the processing of step S759 (step S764). When it is not determined to execute the predetermined effect (step S764; NO), the predetermined effect process is ended.

  When it is determined to execute the predetermined effect (step S764; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the predetermined effect timer to a value corresponding to the time corresponding to the determined predetermined effect pattern. (Step S778), a predetermined effect is started (step S779). The processes of steps S778 and S779 are processes of starting a predetermined effect timer and controlling the effect device such as the image display device 5 according to the content of the process data (the same process as steps S535 and S536 in FIG. 37). is there. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the predetermined effect executing flag (step S780) and ends the predetermined effect processing.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a predetermined effect operation control process (see FIG. 46) and the like. Although it has been described that the Z value of the background (background image) is “10”, it is assumed that the Z value of the background is “11” in FIG.

  FIG. 48 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a predetermined effect operation control process (step S735B). In the predetermined effect operation control process shown in FIG. 48A, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the decorative design is being variably displayed (step S9080). The effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not the decorative design is being variably displayed based on the value of the effect process flag and the received command. For example, the effect control CPU 120, while the value of the effect process flag is 1 or 2, or when the value of the effect process flag is 3 and before the receipt of the symbol fixing designation command, the decorative symbol is being variably displayed. When it is determined that the effect process flag has a value of 0, or when the effect process flag has a value of 3 and has been received after the design confirmation designation command, the decorative design is stopped and displayed (the decorative design is It may be determined that the variable display is not being performed).

  When it is determined that the decorative pattern is variably displayed (step S9080; YES), the effect control CPU 120 has a layer higher than the decorative pattern layer (Z value = 9) (for example, Z value = 8). Then, the operation control of the predetermined effect is executed (started and continued) (step S9081). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display control command specified by the display control data, which is included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern set as the usage pattern in the predetermined effect process (see FIG. 46). The predetermined effect image (Z value = 8) corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed by transmitting it to the VDP or the like of the control unit 123. Then, the predetermined effect operation control process is ended.

  When it is determined that the decorative pattern is not in the variable stop state (step S9080; NO), the effect control CPU 120 uses a layer (for example, Z value = 10) lower than the decorative pattern layer (Z value = 9). The operation control of a predetermined effect is executed (started and continued) (step S9082). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display control command specified by the display control data, which is included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern set as the usage pattern in the predetermined effect process (see FIG. 46). A predetermined effect image (Z value = 10) corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed by transmitting it to VDP or the like of the control unit 123. Then, the predetermined effect operation control process is ended.

  FIG. 48 (B) shows a predetermined effect image (an example). The predetermined effect image shown in FIG. 48 (A) is an image G16 of a roulette table for displaying a predetermined effect pattern (for example, after the variable display, the results such as “◯” and “x” are displayed. See FIG. 47), and the predetermined effect image. The image G17 of the effect design is included. The display time of the predetermined effect image (execution time of the predetermined effect) is, for example, a time corresponding to the effect time of the selected predetermined effect pattern. The black arrow "↓" in the image G17 indicates that the predetermined effect design is changing. In the predetermined effect, when the image G17 showing the result “◯” is displayed after the image G17 showing the change is displayed (the result “x” is shown after the image G17 showing the change is displayed. Similarly, when the image G17 is once displayed and finally the image G17 showing the result “◯” is displayed), the normal variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state. While the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the display is switched from the result “◯” to, for example, the word “opening”. The result “◯” may be continuously displayed while the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. On the other hand, when the image G17 showing the result “x” is displayed after the image G17 showing the fluctuation is displayed, the normal variable winning ball device 6B is not controlled to the open state.

  48C and 48D are diagrams showing a display operation example in the display area of the image display device 5. 48C and 48D show display operations arranged in time series. In FIG. 48 (C), the arrow (white arrow) “↓” shown in the display area of the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. Further, the black arrow "↓" of the image G17 indicates that the predetermined effect design is changing.

  FIG. 48C shows a scene in which a predetermined effect is being performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 48C includes an image (Z value = 9) of a decorative pattern including the decorative pattern being variably displayed, and an active display image G7 (active display M31). A display image for holding etc. (Z value = 5) and a predetermined effect image (Z value = 8) including an image G16 of the roulette stand and an image G17 of the predetermined effect design are displayed.

  FIG. 48 (D) shows a scene in which a predetermined effect is performed while the decorative design is stopped and displayed. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 48D, an image of a decorative pattern (Z value = 9) including the decorative pattern that is being stopped, an image G16 of the roulette stand and an image G17 of a predetermined effect pattern. A predetermined effect image (Z value = 10) including and is displayed.

  In the above description, when the predetermined effect is executed during the stop display of the decorative pattern, the predetermined effect is executed on the back surface of the decorative pattern that is being stopped, but the stop display is performed even when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. After a predetermined time has passed (for example, one second has passed), a predetermined effect may be performed on the front surface of the decorative design that is being stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 48 (E).

  FIG. 48 (E) shows a scene in which a predetermined effect is being performed during the stop display of the decorative pattern (after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop display). In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 48 (E), an image of a decorative pattern (Z value = 9) including the decorative pattern that is still displayed, an image G16 of the roulette stand and an image G17 of a predetermined effect pattern. A predetermined effect image (Z value = 8) including and is displayed.

  As described above, the error notification image (FIG. 28 (A)), the effect execution notification image (FIG. 28 (B)), the accessory effect effect image (FIG. 28 (C)), the hold display image (FIG. 29 (A)), Group notice effect image (FIG. 29 (B)), chance zone effect image (FIG. 29 (C)), step-up notice effect image (FIG. 29 (D)), predetermined effect image (FIG. 48 (B)), etc. Although the Z value of the image has been described, the Z value of an image other than the above will be described below.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of Z values and the like of other images. FIG. 49 (A) shows a cumulative prize ball number notification image (an example) for reporting the cumulative prize ball number. The cumulative award ball number notification image shown in FIG. 49 (A) includes a pictogram image G18 for notifying that the predetermined cumulative award ball number (for example, 3000, 5000, 10000, etc.) has been reached. It should be noted that the pictogram image G18 in FIG. 49 (A) is for notifying that the number has reached 5000. The display time of the cumulative prize ball number notification image (the notification time of the cumulative prize ball number) may be, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or may be until the end of the round. The display time of the cumulative award ball number notification image may be changed according to the cumulative award ball number to be notified.

  FIG. 49 (B) shows a prize ball number notification image (an example) for notifying the number of prize balls for each big hit. The prize ball number notification image shown in FIG. 49 (B) includes a pictogram image G19 for notifying that the predetermined cumulative number of prize balls (for example, 1000, 2000, etc.) has been reached. It should be noted that the pictogram image G19 in FIG. 49 (B) notifies that the number of images has reached 2000. The display time of the prize ball notification image (the notification time of the accumulated prize balls) may be, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or may be until the end of the round. The display time of the award ball number notification image may be changed according to the number of award balls to be notified.

  FIG. 49C shows an effect image during opening (one example) displayed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state. The opening effect image shown in FIG. 49 (C) includes an image G20 for notifying what round the current round is, and a frame image G21 for executing the opening effect. Note that, in FIG. 49 (C), although a character or the like is displayed as the opening effect on the frame image G21, it is not shown.

  FIG. 49 (D) is the Z value set for each image shown in FIG. 28 (A) and FIGS. 49 (A) to 49 (C). According to the Z value setting shown in FIG. 49 (D), the cumulative prize ball notification image is displayed in front of the opening effect image, and the prize ball notification image is displayed in front of the accumulated prize ball notification image. An error notification image (see FIG. 28A) is displayed in front of the prize ball number notification image. Note that the Z value of each image is not limited to the example in FIG. 49 (D). For example, instead of FIG. 49 (D), the Z value may be set for each image as shown in FIG. 49 (E), or the Z value may be set for each image as shown in FIG. 49 (F). Alternatively, the Z value may be set for each image as shown in FIG. 49 (G).

  FIG. 50 is a conceptual diagram or the like that schematically shows the layers of various images. When the Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 49 (D), the error notification image having the Z value “0” is displayed in the foreground layer as shown in FIG. 50 (A). The award ball number notification image having the Z value “1” is displayed on one of the back layers of the error notification image, and the cumulative award ball number notification image having the Z value “2” is one of the award ball number notification images. An in-opening effect image that is displayed on the back layer and has a Z value of “3” is displayed on the back layer that is one of the cumulative award ball number notification images. Further, when the Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 49D, when the error notification, the prize ball number notification, the cumulative prize ball number notification, and the execution period of the effect during opening overlap, the image is displayed. In the display area of the display device 5, each image is displayed, for example, as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 51 is a conceptual diagram or the like that schematically shows the layers of various images. When the Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 49 (G), the cumulative prize number notification image having the Z value of “0” is displayed in the foreground as shown in FIG. 51 (A). An award ball number notification image displayed on a layer and having a Z value of "1" is displayed on a layer behind one of the accumulated award ball number notification images, and an error notification image having a Z value of "2" is an award ball number notification image. Of the error notification image is displayed on the back layer of the error notification image. Further, when the Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 49 (G), when the cumulative award ball number notification, the award ball number notification, the error notification, and the execution period of the effect during opening overlap, In the display area of the display device 5, each image is displayed, for example, as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing an example of the in-round process (step S175). In the description of FIG. 52A, it is assumed that the Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 49D. The flowchart of FIG. 52B will be described later.

  In the effect display during variable display shown in FIG. 52 (A), the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a special winning opening post notification command is received (step S571).

  When it is determined that the notification command after opening the special winning opening is not received (step S571; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation control of the effect during opening in the fourth layer from the top (Z value = 3). (Start and continue) (step S572). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 includes display control included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the during-opening effect set as the usage pattern in the jackpot start process (see FIG. 32) and the post-round process (see FIG. 32). By transmitting a display control command designated by the data to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, an opening effect image (see FIG. 49 (C)) corresponding to the opening effect is displayed.

  After executing the process of step S572, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number notification operation control process (step S573). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 adds the number of prize balls each time it receives the special winning opening prize notification command in the big hit game state this time, and the number of prize balls after the addition is a predetermined number (for example, 1000, When the number reaches 2000, the operation control for informing the number of prize balls is executed (started, continued) in the second layer from the top (Z value = 1) for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of the number of prize balls as the use pattern, and displays the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. By transmitting to the VDP or the like of the control unit 123, a prize ball number notification image (see FIG. 49 (B)) corresponding to the prize ball number notification is displayed.

  After executing the processing of step S573, the effect control CPU 120 executes the cumulative award ball number notification operation control processing (step S574). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120, in a continuous big hit game state (a big hit game state that is continuously shifting without becoming a normal state), receives a special winning opening winning notification command, and accumulates the number of prize balls. Is added, and when the cumulative number of prize balls after addition reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000 balls, 5000 balls, 10000 balls, etc.), the third layer from the top (Z value) for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). = 2), the operation control for informing the cumulative number of prize balls is executed (started and continued). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the cumulative award ball number notification as a use pattern, and displays a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. A cumulative prize ball number notification image (see FIG. 49 (A)) corresponding to the cumulative prize ball number notification is displayed by transmitting the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Then, the processing during the round is ended. In addition, whether or not the normal state after the jackpot gaming state has ended (whether or not it has transitioned to the low-probability low base state) has received a game state designation command (designation to transition to the low-probability low base state) Whether or not, the effect control board 12 side may be determined by managing (counting) the ST times (probability variation times) and time saving times, as in the main board 11 side.

  When it is determined that the notification command after opening the special winning opening is received (step S571; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect during closing (step S576), and sets the value of the effect process flag to the post-round processing. The value is updated to "6" (step S577), and the round is ended.

  Further, in the above description, the mode for determining the type of big hit is determined based on the value of the random number MR2 for determining the type of big hit, but the condition for determining the type of big hit is not limited to this. For example, a specific area may be provided in the vicinity of the special winning opening or inside the special winning opening, and the type of the big hit may be determined based on the game ball entering (passing through) the specific area. Good. Specifically, for example, the probability variation big hit may be determined based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area in the big hit game state. Further, when the probability variation big hit is determined based on the game ball entering the specific area, the confirmation of the probability variation big hit may be notified (probability variation confirmation notification).

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of Z values and the like of other images. FIG. 53 (A) shows a probability variation confirmation notification image (an example) for notifying the confirmation of the probability variation big hit. The probability change confirmation notification image shown in FIG. 53 (A) includes a character image G22 for notifying the word "probability change!".

  FIG. 53 (B) is the Z value set in the probability variation confirmation notification image shown in FIG. 28 (A), FIG. 49 (A) to FIG. 49 (C), and FIG. 53 (A). According to the setting of the Z value shown in FIG. 53 (B), the cumulative prize number notification image is displayed in front of the opening effect image, and the prize number notification image is displayed in front of the cumulative prize number notification image. The probability variation confirmation notification image is displayed in front of the prize ball number notification image, and the error notification image is displayed in front of the probability variation confirmation notification image. Note that the Z value of each image is not limited to the example in FIG. For example, the Z value may be set for each image as shown in any of FIGS. 53 (C) to 53 (G) instead of FIG. 53 (B).

  FIG. 54 is a conceptual diagram or the like that schematically shows the layers of various images. When a Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 53 (B), an error notification image having a Z value of “0” is displayed in the foreground layer as shown in FIG. 54 (A). The probability variation confirmation notification image having the Z value of “1” is displayed on the back layer of the error notification image, and the prize ball number notification image having the Z value of “2” is the rear layer of the probability variation confirmation notification image. , The cumulative prize number notification image having the Z value “3” is displayed on the layer one back of the prize number notification image, and the opening effect image having the Z value “4” notifies the cumulative prize number. It is displayed in the layer one behind the image. Further, when the Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 53 (B), the execution period of the error notification, the probability variation confirmation notification image, the prize ball number notification, the accumulated prize ball number notification, and the opening performance is When overlapping, each image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 54 (B), for example.

  FIG. 52 (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the processing during a round (step S175) in the mode in which the probability variation confirmation notification image is displayed when the probability variation big hit is determined based on the game ball entering the specific area. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 52 (B), the same steps as those in FIG. 52 (A) are designated by the same step numbers. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 52 (B), in the aspect in which the probability variation confirmation notification image is displayed when the probability variation jackpot is confirmed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the cumulative prize ball number notification operation control process (step S574). After that, the probability variation confirmation notification operation control process is executed (step S575). That is, when the game medium passes through the specific area, the effect control CPU 120 receives a certainty change confirmation notification command (not shown) transmitted from the main board 11 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). , A predetermined layer (for example, when the Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 53 (B), the second layer from the uppermost layer (Z value = 1), or, for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (C) As described above, when the Z value is set for each image, the operation control of the probability variation confirmation notification is executed (started and continued) in the uppermost layer (Z value = 0). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the probability change confirmation notification as the use pattern, and performs display control of the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. The probability variation confirmation notification image (see FIG. 53 (A)) corresponding to the probability variation confirmation notification is displayed by transmitting it to the VDP or the like of the unit 123.

  In the above description, there is only one type of character effect effect image displayed corresponding to the action of the movable accessory 17, but it is a character effect effect image displayed corresponding to the action of the movable accessory 17. May be two or more. Further, when there are two types of character effect effect images displayed corresponding to the operation of the movable accessory 17, the same Z value may be set to the two kinds of character effect effect images. Different Z values may be set. Further, when there are three or more types of character effect effect images displayed corresponding to the action of the movable accessory 17, the same Z value may be set for all character effect effect images, or at least the same. For one type of character effect effect image, a Z value different from that of other character effect effect images may be set.

  Further, in the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has one movable body (movable accessory 17), but it may have two or more movable bodies. In an aspect including two or more movable bodies, respective accessory effect effect images displayed corresponding to the movements of the respective movable bodies may be prepared. Further, the same Z value may be set in each of the above-described character effect effect images, or different Z values may be set. For example, if there are two types of character effect effect images (for example, character effect effect image a corresponding to the operation of the movable body A and character effect effect image b corresponding to the operation of the movable body B), The same Z value may be set for the types of character effect effect images a and b, or different Z values may be set for each of the two types of character effect effect images a and b. In addition, three types of character effect effect images (for example, character effect effect images c corresponding to the movement of the movable body C, character effect effect images d corresponding to the movement of the movable body D, and movements of the movable body E are supported. When there is a character effect effect image e) to be performed, the same Z value may be set for all three types, different Z values may be set for all three types, or the same for both types. A Z value (for example, 4) may be set and a different Z value (for example, 6) may be set for another type. The same applies when there are four or more types of accessory effect effect images. Further, in a mode including two or more movable bodies, when there are a plurality of character effect effect images with the same Z value set, the display areas of the respective character effect effect images with the same Z value overlap. You may not want to become. In other words, the same Z value may be set for the accessory effect effect images whose display areas do not overlap.

  In the above description, the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 is set in the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547) in the effect effect display during variable display (step S172) (step S9063). In the display start setting process (step S171), an effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 may be set. Specifically, when it is determined that the step-up notice effect (SU5) is executed in the step-up notice effect determination process of step S530A, the effect control pattern corresponding to SU5 is set in the process of setting the effect control pattern of step S532. May be set as the usage pattern, and the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 may be set.

  Further, in the above description, in the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547) within the effect effect display during variable display (step S172), the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the group notice effect is set (S9067). In the variable display start setting process (step S171), an effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of execution of the group notice effect may be set. Specifically, when it is determined to execute the group notice effect in the group notice effect determination process of step S530B, the effect control pattern corresponding to the group notice effect is used in the process of setting the effect control pattern of step S532. And the effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of execution of the group notice effect may be set.

  Further, in the above description, in the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547) within the effect effect display during variable display (step S172), the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect notification of the accessory effect is set (S9071). In the variable display start setting process (step S171), an effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of execution of the accessory effect may be set. Specifically, in the case of the variation pattern of super reach β, in the process of setting the production control pattern of step S532, the production control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of super reach β is set as the use pattern and You may set the production control pattern corresponding to the notification of the execution of the production.

  Further, in the above description, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, when the number of notifications is 3, the Z value of the pictogram image G3-1 that notifies the first effect in the notification start order is “3”, and the number of notifications is 2 or more. In the case of, the Z value of the pictogram image G3-2 for notifying the second effect in the notification start order is “2”, and when the number of notifications is 1 or more, the pictogram image G3-3 for notifying the third effect in the notification start order. , The Z value of the pictogram image G3-1 is "1", the Z value of the pictogram image G3-2 is "2", and the Z value of the pictogram image G3-3 is "1". It may be 3 ". That is, when a plurality of effect execution notification images are displayed, a new one may be displayed in a lower order (back side) instead of being displayed in a higher order (front side).

  Further, in the above description, the setting range of the Z value is 0 to 9 (or 0 to 10), but the setting range of the Z value is not limited to the above. Further, the Z value does not necessarily have to be an integer.

  Further, in the above description, the Z value of the step-up notice effect image is constant (Z value = 8) regardless of the number of steps (SU1 to SU5) (FIG. 27), but the Z value is changed according to the number of steps. May be. For example, the Z value of SU1 to SU3 may be 8, and the Z value of SU4 and SU5 may be 7.5. Further, in the above description, the display size of the step-up notice effect image is large (FIG. 27), but the display size may be changed according to the number of steps. For example, the display size of SU1 to SU3 may be small, and the display size of SU4 and SU5 may be large.

  Also, the chance zone effect may have a plurality of chance zones with different expectations (low-expectancy zone, medium-expectancy zone, high-expectancy zone), and if the Z value differs depending on the expectation. You may let me. There may be a case where the low-expectancy zone shifts to the medium-expectancy zone (or a high-expectancy zone) or a case where the medium-expectancy zone shifts to the high-expectancy zone. The Z value may be changed when shifting to the chance zone of another expectation.

  Note that FIG. 31B shows a scene in which all seven types of images shown in FIG. 27 together with the Z value are displayed simultaneously, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not display all seven types of images at the same time. May be. Further, FIG. 50B shows a scene in which the four types of images shown in FIG. 49 together with the Z value are displayed at the same time, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not display all the four types of images at the same time. May be. Further, FIG. 54 (B) shows a scene in which all of the five types of images shown in FIG. 53 together with the Z value are displayed simultaneously, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not display all of the five types of images at the same time. May be. It should be noted that not displaying at the same time means that effects and notifications are not executed (that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes only a part of the 7 kinds of effects of FIG. 27A, or FIG. 54, the notification of the number of prize balls, the notification of the number of accumulated prize balls, and the notification of the probability change confirmation are executed only partially). If they cannot be displayed at the same time, or an effect or notification is executed. This includes a case where the timings are different and therefore they cannot be displayed simultaneously. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not display the predetermined effect image shown in FIG. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to execute the predetermined effect process shown in FIG.

  Further, the Z values of all the seven types of images shown in FIG. 27 are different, but at least some of the images may have the same Z value. The same applies to the images in FIGS. 49 and 53. When displaying images with the same Z value, the images may not overlap each other. For example, when the image A having a certain Z value is displayed, the image B having the same Z value as the image A may not be displayed. Further, the display start timing of the image B may be delayed until the display end timing of the image A. The image A may be hidden when the image B is displayed (that is, the display end timing of the image A may be advanced). Further, for example, by changing the display position or the display size of the image B (or by changing the display position or the display size of the image A, or by changing the display position or the display size of the images A and B). Therefore, the image A and the image B may not be overlapped.

  Further, in the above description, an example in which an error notification image is displayed when a magnetic abnormality occurs is described (see FIG. 27), but other errors (for example, an error caused by opening a glass door, an error caused by vibration detection, etc.). , The error notification image may be displayed when an error occurs due to the lower plate full. The Z value may be different depending on the type of error. For example, the Z value of an error based on the lower plate full may be a value between 3 and 4 (for example, 3.5), and the Z values of other errors may be 0.

  Although the Z value of the decorative design is set to 9 in FIG. 27B, the Z value of the design (always small design) displayed on the image display device 5 separately from the decorative design is a value between 0 and 1 ( For example, it may be 0.5) or the highest priority (Z value = 0). In addition, the small symbols are not always required to represent the reach state (the three symbols are displayed so as to be displayed in a variable state, or the three symbols are displayed such that all the symbols are stopped and displayed. It may be expressed in either one of the states).

  In the above description, the Z value of the first effect execution notification image is 3, the Z value of the second effect execution notification image is 2, and the Z value of the third effect execution notification image is 1. (See FIG. 27) It is also possible to set the first Z value to 1 and change the first Z value from 1 to 2 when the second is displayed, and set the second Z value to 1. Further, when the third is displayed, the first Z value may be changed from 2 to 3, the second Z value may be changed from 1 to 2, and the third Z value may be 1.

  Note that, as shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, there are a plurality of display timings for each of the plurality of effect execution notification images, and the display order of the notification target effects is not constant. For example, in FIG. 44, the notification target effect (group notice) is displayed first, and in FIG. 45, the notification target effect (SU5) is displayed first. Although not shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the notification target effect (feature) may be displayed first.

  In addition, in the above description, the notification target production of the production execution notification is step 5 (SU5) of the step-up notice production, the group notice production, and the accessory production, but other productions (for example, the title notice production, the next notice production). , Mini-character notice production, cut-in production, etc.) may be used as the notification target production of the production execution notification. Further, the notification target effects may be one type, two types, or four or more types. A mission achievement display using a mobile terminal (mobile phone, smartphone, etc.) may be displayed as the effect of the effect execution notification.

  Further, in FIG. 48, the relationship between the Z value of the predetermined effect image, the Z value of the decorative pattern being variably displayed, and the Z value of the decorative pattern being stopped and displayed (the predetermined effect image, the decorative pattern being variably displayed, and the stop display). Although the priority order of the decorative pattern inside) has been described, the relationship with images other than the predetermined effect image may be the same. That is, in FIG. 48, the Z value of the decorative pattern being stopped and displayed <Z value of the predetermined effect image <Z value of the decorative pattern being variably displayed (priority of the decorative pattern being stopped displayed> Priority of the predetermined effect image> However, the same relationship may be applied to other effect images as well. As an example, the Z value of the decorative pattern being variably displayed may be 9 (similar to FIG. 48), and the Z value of the decorative pattern being stopped and displayed may be a value between 0 and 1 (for example, 0.5). . As a result, the decorative pattern (Z value = 9) that is being variably displayed is displayed on the back of, for example, the hold display image (Z value = 5) or the chance zone effect image (Z value = 7), while the stop display is displayed. The decorative pattern inside (Z value = 0.5) comes to be displayed in front of the hold display image and the chance zone effect image. The other effect images are not limited to those shown in FIG. 27 and the like, and may be, for example, a demo image, a menu image, a music selection image, a music display image, a right hitting notification image, a left hitting back notification image, or the like. Good. That is, it is possible to visually recognize the decorative pattern being stopped and displayed without being disturbed by other effects. When the design stop command is received, the Z value of the decorative design is changed from 9 (first value) to 0.5 (second value) (for example, when the fixed decorative design in step S722 is stopped and displayed). The Z value of the decorative pattern may be changed from 0.5 (second value) to 9 (first value) when the next variation pattern designation command is received. . As described in FIG. 48 (E), the Z value of the decorative pattern is returned from 0.5 (second value) to 9 (first value) when a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop display. You may do it. The Z value of the decorative pattern in the stopped display is set to a value between 0 and 1 in order to set the priority of the decorative pattern in the stopped display to the priority following the error notification image.

  Note that in the predetermined effect operation control process of FIG. 48, the Z value of the predetermined effect image is changed according to whether the decorative design is variably displayed or stopped and displayed. Similarly to the case, the Z value of the predetermined effect image is fixed (for example, 8), and the Z value of the decorative pattern is changed depending on whether the variable display or the stop display is being performed (for example, the Z value during the variable display. = 9, Z value = 0.5 during stop display).

  In the above description, the Z value of the hold display and the Z value of the active display are the same, but the Z value of the hold display and the Z value of the active display may be different. For example, Z value of active display <Z value of hold display (priority order of active display> priority order of hold display) may be used. As an example, the Z value of active display <Z value of super-reach image <Z value of reserved display (priority of active display> priority of super-reach image> priority of reserved display). Thereby, for example, during the super reach, the hold display may not be visible, but the active display may be visible. The Z value of the small design (small design for effect) displayed in the reduced form of the decorative design during super reach may be the same Z value as the active display, or the Z value between the active display and the super reach image. It may be a value.

  In the above description, the probability variation confirmation notification image is displayed when the probability variation jackpot is determined based on the game ball entering the specific area in the jackpot game state, but the probability variation confirmation notification image is displayed as the image of the probability variation promotion effect. You may do it. Further, instead of or in addition to the probability variation confirmation notification image, another image (for example, an image of the round number promotion effect, an image for notifying the gaming state) may be displayed. It should be noted that the image for informing about the game state may be, for example, an image for informing that the game is in an advantageous state (for example, a probability variation confirmation informing image, an image for informing that the base is high, a specific variation pattern table (for example, , An image or the like for notifying that a fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time shortened as the time saving control is selected or is easily referred to.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state, a high base state, a highly accurate state, etc.), Determining means for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state (for example, a process for determining a special symbol display result in the special symbol normal process (step S240), a process for determining a big hit type (step S242), etc.), and the determination Judgment means for judging whether or not the advantageous state is controlled prior to the determination of the means (for example, processing for judging whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment in the winning random number judgment processing (step (S406) and processing for determining the type of jackpot (step S407) and the like, and effect images (for example, various effect images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 48, etc.). The production execution means to be executed (for example, the chance zone production operation control processing of step S543, the step-up notice production operation control processing of step S544, etc.) is provided, and the production execution means is based on the determination of the determination means. A first notice effect (for example, a step-up notice effect, etc.) that uses a first effect image (for example, a step-up notice effect image, etc.) as a notice effect to be executed, and a notice effect that is executed based on the determination of the determination means. It is possible to execute a second notice effect (for example, a chance zone effect) using a second effect image (for example, a chance zone effect image) as an image display in comparison with the first effect image. Is set to a high priority (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, a chance zone effect image having a Z value of “7” has a Z value of “8”). It is displayed on the front side than the step-up announcement attraction image).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display diversified effect images.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state, a high base state, a highly accurate state, etc.). Determining means for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state (for example, a process for determining a special symbol display result in the special symbol normal process (step S240), a process for determining a big hit type (step S242), etc.), and the determination Judgment means for judging whether or not the advantageous state is controlled prior to the determination of the means (for example, processing for judging whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment in the winning random number judgment processing (step (S406) and processing for determining the type of jackpot (step S407) and the like, and effect images (for example, various effect images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 48, etc.). The production execution means to be executed (for example, the chance zone production operation control processing of step S543, the group notice production operation control processing of step S545, etc.) is provided, and the production execution means is executed based on the determination of the determination means. A first notice effect (for example, a group notice effect or the like) that uses a first effect image (for example, a group notice effect image or the like) as the notice effect, and a second notice effect that is executed based on the determination made by the determination means. A second notice effect (for example, chance zone effect) using an effect image (for example, chance zone effect image) can be executed, and the first effect image is compared with the second effect image in priority order of image display. Is set to a high value (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, the group notice effect image of Z value “6” is displayed in front of the chance zone effect image of Z value “7”. ).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display diversified effect images.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine that performs a game, and performs an effect using an effect image (for example, various effect images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 48, etc.). The production execution means (for example, the group notice production operation control processing of step S545, the accessory motion control processing of step S546, etc.) is provided, and the production execution means is interlocked with the operation of the movable body (movable accessory 17 etc.). The interlocking effect (for example, the effect effect effect, etc.) using the interlocking image (for example, the effect effect effect image, etc.) displayed with the non-interlocking image (for example, the non-interlocking image displayed without interlocking with the movement of the movable body) A non-interlocking effect (for example, a group notice effect, etc.) using a group notice effect image or the like can be executed, and the priority order of the image display of the interlock image is set to be higher than that of the non-interlocking image (for example, As shown in Figure 30 , Character object effect effect image Z value "4" is displayed on the front side of the group announcement attraction image Z value "6").

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display diversified effect images. Although it has been described that the interlocked image is displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body, the display start timing of the interlocked image and the operation start timing of the movable body may not necessarily coincide with each other. The display end timing and the operation end timing of the movable body may not necessarily match. In other words, an image with a display time that does not match the operation time of the movable body may be included in the linked image. For example, an image displayed before the start of the operation of the movable body to inform the player that the movable body is operating, or an image displayed after the end of the operation of the movable body to give the player a reverberation of the operation of the movable body is also a linked image. included. Further, the display content of the interlocking image may be the display content according to the shape, the motion, etc. of the movable body (for example, the display content of the interlocking image shown in FIG. 28C corresponds to the shape of the movable accessory 17). Although the combined circular effect image G4 is used), the display content of the interlocked image does not have to be the display content according to the shape and operation of the movable body. In other words, an image with display content that does not match the shape or motion of the movable body may be included in the linked image. For example, when the movable body operates, if the image is an image related to the movement of the movable body (an image that gives advance notice, complement, emphasis, etc. of the movement of the movable body), the display content irrelevant to the shape or the movement of the movable body is displayed. Even an image is included in the linked image.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols), and the variable display which has not started yet is stored as pending information. Hold storage means (for example, first special figure hold storage section 151A, second special figure hold storage section 151B, first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A, second start prize-winning reception command buffer 194B, etc.) and the hold storage On-hold display means for displaying an on-hold image (for example, on-hold display image, etc.) corresponding to the on-hold information stored in the means (for example, processing for adding an on-hold display in the prize-winning effect determination processing (steps S162, S165) and , A process of consuming the hold display in the variable display start setting process (step S531), and an effect image (for example, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 4). And the like, the effect execution means (for example, the accessory operation control process of step S546) for executing the effect using various effect images shown in FIG. 17 and the like), it is possible to execute a linked effect (for example, a character effect effect, etc.) using a linked image (for example, a character effect effect image, etc.), and the linked image is the hold image. The priority of image display is set to be higher than that of the image display (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, a character effect display image with a Z value of “4” is displayed higher than a display image with a hold such as a Z value of “5”. Displayed on the front side).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display diversified effect images.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine that performs a game, and performs an effect using an effect image (for example, various effect images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 48, etc.). The production execution means (for example, the group notice production operation control processing of step S545, the chance zone production operation control processing of step S543, etc.) is provided, and the production execution means includes the first area (see FIG. 27A). The first effect (for example, chance zone effect) using the first effect image (for example, chance zone effect image) in the image size “small” area, and the second area wider than the first area (FIG. 27). It is possible to execute a second effect (for example, a group notice effect, etc.) that uses a second effect image (for example, a group notice effect image, etc.) in the area of the image size “large” as shown in (A). 2 staging Is set to have a higher image display priority than the first effect image (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, a group notice effect image with a Z value of “6” is a chance zone with a Z value of “7”). Displayed on the front side of the effect image).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display diversified effect images. It should be noted that the second effect image may be set to have a higher image display priority than the first effect image, and the first effect image and the second effect image may be changed to a chance zone effect image or a group notice effect image. Not limited. For example, as the first effect image (or second effect image), an error notification image, a hold display image, a character effect effect image, a step-up notice effect image, a predetermined effect image, a probability change confirmation notification image, and a prize ball number notification Image, cumulative prize ball number notification image may be displayed, and other images (demo image, menu image, music selection image, right hitting notification image, left hitting back notification image, promotion image, small pattern image, etc.) , May be displayed as the first effect image (or the second effect image).

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine that performs a game, and performs an effect using an effect image (for example, various effect images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 48, etc.). The production execution means (for example, the chance zone production operation control processing of step S543, the step-up notice production operation control processing of step S544, etc.) is provided, and the production execution means is shown in the first area (FIG. 27A). As described above, the first effect (for example, chance zone effect) using the first effect image (for example, chance zone effect image) in the image size “small” area and the second area wider than the first area (FIG. The second effect (for example, step-up preview performance) that uses the second effect image (for example, step-up preview performance image) in the image size “large” area as shown in FIG. Etc.) and the first effect image is set to have a higher image display priority than the second effect image (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, a chance of Z value “7”). The zone effect image is displayed in front of the step-up notice effect image having the Z value of "8").

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display diversified effect images. It is sufficient that the first effect image is set to have a higher image display priority than the second effect image, and the first effect image and the second effect image are the chance zone effect image and the step-up notice effect image. Not limited to. For example, as the first effect image (or second effect image), an error notification image, a hold display image, a character effect effect image, a step-up notice effect image, a predetermined effect image, a probability change confirmation notification image, and a prize ball number notification Image, cumulative prize ball number notification image may be displayed, and other images (demo image, menu image, music selection image, right hitting notification image, left hitting back notification image, promotion image, small pattern image, etc.) , May be displayed as the first effect image (or the second effect image).

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a notifying means (for example, an error notifying process of step S75) that performs a notification using a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28 and the like), and the notification is performed. The means can notify an error using an error notification image (for example, the error notification image shown in FIG. 28), and the error notification image is set to have a higher image display priority than the effect image. (For example, as shown in FIG. 30, the error notification image with the Z value “0” is displayed in front of the accessory effect effect image with the Z value “4”, for example).

  With such a configuration, the effect image can be preferably displayed. For example, the effect image can be preferably displayed without disturbing the error notification.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a notifying unit (for example, effect execution notifying operation control processing of step S547) that performs notification using a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28 and the like). The information means indicates that the specific effect has been executed when the specific effect (for example, step 5 (SU5) of step-up notice effect, group notice effect, character effect effect, etc.) is executed. For example, it is possible to notify using a performance execution notification image, etc., and the information image is set to have a high priority (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, a Z value “1” is set in the performance execution notification image). ~ "3" is set).

  With such a configuration, the visibility of the information image can be improved.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect execution means displays a first interlocking image (for example, a character effect effect image, which is displayed in association with the operation of the first movable body (for example, the movable body A described above). The first interlocking effect using a) and the second interlocking image (for example, character effect effect image b) displayed in conjunction with the operation of the second movable body (for example, the above-mentioned movable body B) are used. The second interlocking effect can be executed, and the first interlocking image may be set with a priority different from that of the second interlocking image (for example, as described above, the role effect effect image a and the role effect image). Different Z values may be set for the object effect effect image b).

  With such a configuration, the effect image can be preferably displayed. For example, the effect images according to the movable body can be preferably displayed in different priorities.

  In addition, the same priority order as that of the second interlocking image may be set for the first interlocking image (for example, as described above, the accessory effect effect image a and the accessory effect effect image b are the same. May set the Z value of).

  With such a configuration, the effect image can be preferably displayed. For example, an effect image corresponding to a movable body can be preferably displayed with the same priority.

  Also, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable display means (for example, a variable display start setting process for performing variable display of identification information (for example, a decorative pattern or the like), and a process of setting a production control pattern corresponding to the variable pattern as a use pattern ( (S532) and a process for variably displaying a decorative design based on the effect control pattern set in the variable display effect process (step S542), etc., and the effect executing means is in a state where the game medium is easy to win ( For example, a predetermined effect image (for example, a predetermined effect image in FIG. 48B) as an effect for notifying whether the variable winning device (for example, the normal variable winning ball device 6B or the like) is controlled in a high base state or the like. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect using, for example, a predetermined effect executed in the predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 46, and a predetermined effect image. , The priority of image display is set to be higher than that of the identification information at least in a predetermined period during variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 48C, a predetermined effect image is displayed during variable display of decorative patterns). (Displayed in a layer higher than the pattern), the priority of image display is set lower than the identification information at least during a predetermined period during stop display (for example, as shown in FIG. 48D, decoration) While the symbol is stopped and displayed, the predetermined effect image is displayed in a layer lower than the decorative symbol).

  With such a configuration, the effect image can be preferably displayed. For example, the predetermined effect image can be suitably displayed depending on whether the identification information is being variably displayed or being stopped.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 uses a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 49, FIG. 53, etc.) to perform notification by means of notification means (for example, prize ball number notification in step S573). An operation control process and a cumulative prize ball number notification operation control process in step S574, etc. are provided, and the notification means uses the first value notification image (eg, prize ball number notification image etc.) for a specific period (big hit of each time). A special period (for example, in a normal state) using a value (for example, the number of prize balls for the big hit) and a second value notification image (for example, an image for accumulating prize balls) acquired in a game state) It is possible to notify the size of the value (for example, the cumulative number of prize balls in the jackpot in consecutive chan, etc.) that has been acquired in the jackpot gaming state in which the player continuously transitions without becoming the first value notification image. Different from the second value notification image Priority is set that (for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (D), are set different Z value and the cumulative prize counts notification image for prize balls number notification image).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute a plurality of notification effects.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 uses a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 49, FIG. 53, etc.) to perform a notification (for example, error notification processing in step S75 or , The prize ball number notification operation control process of step S573, the accumulated prize ball number notification operation control process of step S574, and the like), and the notification unit is an error notification image (for example, the error notification image shown in FIG. 28). It is possible to inform the error and the value (for example, the number of prize balls) acquired by using the value notification image (for example, the prize ball number notification image, the accumulated prize ball number notification image, etc.) Different priorities are set for the notification image and the value notification image (for example, as shown in FIG. 49D, the error notification image is different from the prize ball number notification image and the accumulated prize ball number notification image. Z value is set ).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute a plurality of notification effects.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 uses a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 49, FIG. 53, etc.) to perform a notification (for example, error notification processing in step S75 or , The probability change confirmation notification operation control processing of step S575), and the notification means uses an error notification image (for example, the error notification image shown in FIG. 28) and an error and a status notification image (for example, FIG. 53). The state (for example, the state of probability change after the end of the jackpot gaming state) using the probability change confirmation notification image shown in, the image that notifies that it will be a high base, the image that notifies that a specific fluctuation pattern table is referenced, etc. The fact that the error notification image and the status notification image have different priorities are set. It may be those who are (e.g., as shown in FIG. 53 (B), the error notification image is set different Z value from the probability variation determined notification image).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute a plurality of notification effects.

  It should be noted that the image display device 5 displays a small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol, but the image of the small symbol may have a higher priority of image display than the effect image. . For example, an image of a small symbol may be set to have a higher image display priority than an error notification image (excluding an error notification image that notifies a serious error such as a game stop).

  Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, various performance operations including the performance image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, and the like. Can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the display mode of the hold display is three colors of white, yellow, and red (see FIG. 35), but the display mode of the hold display is not limited to this. For example, at least one color different from the above three colors (white, yellow, red) and other three colors (for example, three colors of white, blue, and red, and three colors of gray, light blue, and purple) may be used. It may be two colors or four or more colors. In addition, patterns, shapes, and sizes may be different. The same applies to active display. The same effect can be obtained by such a configuration. Further, there may be a display mode only for active display that is not displayed as a hold display. This improves the interest.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the display mode of the hold display is changed during the shift, but the display mode of the hold display may be changed at another timing instead of or in addition to during the shift. For example, it may be changed during variable display of the decorative pattern. The same applies to active display. The same effect can be obtained by such a configuration. Also, the interest is improved.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the active display are determined simultaneously (by one determination), but they may be determined separately. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display mode of the hold display at each display position is collectively determined at the time of winning, but the display mode of the hold display after the shift may be determined every shift. Further, in the above embodiment, the display mode of the active display is determined at the time of winning, but the display mode of the active display may be determined at the time of displaying in the active display area AHA. The same effect can be obtained by such a configuration.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, whether it is a super reach (loss) (variation pattern “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”) or super reach (big hit) (variation pattern “PB4-X”). Or "PB5-X"), the determination rate of whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect is made different (see FIG. 38 (A)), but whether it is super reach α (variation pattern "PA4-X"). Or “PB4-X”) or super-reach β (variation pattern “PA5-X” or “PB5-X”), if the determination rate of whether to execute the step-up notice effect is different. You may let me. The same applies to the determination rate of the step-up notice production pattern and the determination rate of the group notice production. In addition, it is possible to more strongly suggest whether or not a big hit will be obtained by varying the determination rate depending on whether it is a super reach (miss) or a super reach (big hit). On the other hand, by making the determination ratio different depending on whether it is super-reach α or super-reach β, it is possible to more strongly suggest which super-reach it will be.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, whether or not to execute the holding effect is determined according to the non-specific pattern (miss), the specific pattern (miss), the non-specific pattern (big hit), and the specific pattern (big hit). Instead of the specific pattern (loose), the specific pattern (loose), the non-specific pattern (big hit), and the specific pattern (big hit), whether or not to execute the holding effect depending on the variation category shown in FIG. You may decide. The same applies to the determination of effect patterns such as holding. In the mode of determining whether or not to execute the effect such as hold depending on the variation category, for example, the variation category shown in FIG. 20 (A) is determined at the time of winning, and the variation category command according to the determined variation category. Should be sent.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the step-up notice effect and the group notice effect are exemplified as the main notice effect, but other effects (for example, a title notice effect, a next notice effect, a mini-character notice effect, a cut-in effect, etc.) are possible. May be. The same effect can be obtained by such a configuration.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the variation category determination table for big hits (see FIGS. 20 (C) and (D)) is common to the number of reserved memories “0” to “4”, but the variation category determination for loss is made. Similar to the table (see FIGS. 20 (A) and 20 (B)) and the like, they may be divided according to the number of reserved memories.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the pending data (holding information) is stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 151B, it is stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 151B. Although the reserved data is consumed preferentially (see FIG. 18), among the reserved data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 151S and the second special figure pending storage unit 151B, the winning order is reserved first. The data may be digested. For example, a distribution device may be provided, and the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be alternately prized so that the reserved data is consumed in the winning order.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the “ratio” is not limited to the relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B: C = 70%: 20%: 10, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 38B and FIG. 38B, the relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% and A: B: C = 70%: 30%: 0 (that is, It is a concept that also includes those with 100% or 0% allocation).

  Further, in the above embodiment, the number of rounds is two, that is, eight and sixteen, but the number of rounds may be three or more. For example, there may be three types of 4R certainty variation big hit, 8R certainty variation big hit, and 16R certainty variation big hit. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine in which only the probability variation big hit is provided as the type of big hit is shown, but the gaming machine may include the non-determination variation big hit (normal big hit) as the type of big hit.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode has been described in which a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating “0” to “9” and symbols indicating “−” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. Is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a special symbol to be variably displayed may be different from a special symbol derived and displayed as a variable display result. In other words, the special symbols that are not included in the changing plural kinds of special symbols may be displayed as a variable display result, or the special derivation display is not displayed as a variable display result in the changing plural kinds of special symbols. May be included. Also, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and a mode in which variable display is executed using only one type of special symbol may be used. As the variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked (lighting / extinguishing may be repeated alternately). That is, the repetition of lighting and extinguishing may be variable display. And even in this case, the one type of special symbol may be derived and displayed (lighted) last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be. The same applies to variable display of other symbols (eg, ordinary symbols, decorative symbols, etc.).

  Further, in the above embodiment, the big hit game state is controlled on the basis of the big hit symbol being displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, but it is controlled to the big hit game state. However, the embodiment is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided in the vicinity of the second starting winning opening or inside the second starting winning opening, and a big hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the game ball has entered (passed through) the specified area. You can stay in it.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the production control board 12 of a variation pattern indicating a variation time and a variation mode such as the type of reach production and the presence / absence of pseudo-relation, one variation pattern designating command when starting the variation. Although the example in which the change pattern is transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not there is a pseudo-relation with the first command, whether or not there is a sliding effect, etc., before reaching the reach (so-called when the reach is not reached. A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command indicates the type of the reach and the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect. You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and the fluctuation mode of (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control board 12 may perform the effect control in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 560 notifies the change time by each of two commands, and the effect control board 12 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. Good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt). (In) the second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. As described above, the variation pattern is notified by two or more commands, so that the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 is stored with the random number determination tables (the display result determination table, the big hit type determination table, and the variation category determination table), and the random numbers are extracted on the main substrate 11 at the time of winning the start. Based on the random number values (MR1 to MR3), the main board 11 refers to the random number value determination table to determine the random number value (determine whether or not to be a big hit, change category, and a big hit). Is a jackpot type determination), and the effect control board 12 receives the determination result determined by the main board 11 and executes the pre-reading notice effect based on the received determination result. The manner of executing the prefetching notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the random number determination table is stored in the effect control board 12, and the random number value itself is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (for example, an effect control command capable of specifying the random value from the main board 11). To the effect control board 12, the effect control board 12 receives the random number value itself extracted in the main board 11, and refers to the random number value determination table based on the received random value to obtain the random value. The pre-reading notice effect may be executed based on the judgment result of the judgment process. That is, the random number value determination process may be performed in the effect control board 12. Further, the random number determination process may be performed by both the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. For example, the effect control board 12 may receive a part of the random number values and perform the random number value determination processing, and may also receive the determination result determined by the main board 11. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 12 receives the random number values (MR1 and MR2), determines whether or not to be a big hit, and if it is a big hit, determines the type of big hit, and at the same time, outputs the random number value. You may make it receive the determination result of the variation category determined by the main board 11 based on (MR3). That is, the effect control board 12 can execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main board 11.

  Further, the random numbers may not be synchronized by changing the update timing of each random number or changing the update range of each random number.

  Further, for example, a game machine that gives a game score for use in a game by using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified by information recorded on a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card The present invention can be applied. Further, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by hitting a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into a game area.

  Further, in the above description, it has been described that the ROM 101 stores data that configures a plurality of determination tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. It does not necessarily have to be stored in a table format (including structures, arrays, etc.). That is, the judgment values (decision values) to be compared with the extracted random number values may be stored collectively in the ROM 101, or may be distributed (spotted) and stored in a plurality of locations in the ROM 101. Alternatively, a mathematical expression or a program that outputs a result (for example, a big hit or a loss in the example of FIG. 6) when the extracted random number value is input may be stored in the ROM 101. The same applies to the determination table and the like stored in the ROM 121.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is shown as a game machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus) are mounted.

  For example, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a slot machine as described above, and uses a production image (various images displayed on a liquid crystal screen of the slot machine) to produce an effect (for example, whether a bonus or the like is established or not). Various related effects, etc.) are provided, and the effect executing means includes an interlocking effect using an interlocking image displayed in association with an operation of a movable body (a movable body included in the slot machine), It is possible to perform a non-interlocking effect that uses a non-interlocking image that is displayed without being interlocked with the operation of the movable body, and the interlocking image has a higher priority of image display than the non-interlocking image. May be The non-interlocked image is an image displayed without interlocking with the operation of the movable body. Therefore, the non-interlocked image is an image having a higher appearance frequency than the interlocked image or an image giving information of low importance. For example, a greenish image corresponding to a weak watermelon, a push order navigation image, and the like are examples of non-interlocked images. The interlocked image is an image displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body. Therefore, the interlocked image is an image having a low appearance frequency or an image giving information of high importance as compared with the non-interlocking effect. For example, a red-colored image corresponding to strong cherry, an image related to addition, an image of "Aim for 7!", A movie image at the time of freezing, and the like are examples of the interlocked image.

  For example, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a slot machine as described above, and uses a production image (various images displayed on a liquid crystal screen of the slot machine) to produce an effect (for example, whether a bonus or the like is established or not). Various effect etc. which are related) are executed, and the effect execution means is a first effect using the first effect image in the first area (for example, weak watermelon compatible effect using weak watermelon compatible image). And a second effect that uses the second effect image in a second area wider than the first area (such as a strong watermelon-compatible effect that uses a strong watermelon-compatible image. A strong watermelon-compatible image has a smaller image size than a weak watermelon-compatible image). And the second effect image may be a slot machine in which the priority of image display is set higher than that of the first effect image. The first effect image may be a slot machine in which the image display priority is set higher than that of the second effect image.

  The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being pre-installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode can be executed not only by mounting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed by using the hardware resources of the other device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 5HL ... 1st start winning prize memory display area 5HR ... 2nd starting winning prize memory display area 5H ... Starting prize Memory display area 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8 ... Speaker 9 ... Lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 16 ... Role control board 17 ... Movable role 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A ... 1st starting opening switch 22B ... 2nd starting opening switch 23 ... Count switch 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuits 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123 ... Display control unit 126 ... RTC circuit

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of variably displaying identification information,
Production execution means for executing the production using the production image,
Notification means for performing notification using the notification image,
Equipped with
The effect execution means,
A first effect of displaying a first effect image in a first area of the first layer;
A second effect in which a second effect image is displayed in a second area wider than the first area in the second layer arranged on the back side of the first layer ;
It is possible to perform a predetermined effect in which a predetermined effect image is displayed in a predetermined area overlapping with the identification information in the third layer different from the first layer and the second layer during a predetermined period spanning multiple times of variable display of the identification information. And
When the identification information is variably displayed, the identification information is displayed on a layer arranged on the back side of the second layer and the third layer ,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed, the identification information is displayed on a layer arranged on the front side of the first layer and the third layer ,
The notification means can notify an error using an error notification image,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the error notification image has a higher priority of image display than the effect image. Further comprising character information display means for displaying character information related to variable display,
The character information display means,
Display the character information corresponding to the effect being performed during variable display,
Even if the interlocking image that is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body is displayed, the content of the text information can be displayed so that it can be specified.
The display time of the character information is changed according to the type of presentation corresponding to the character information,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein: